JP7294731B1 - playground - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having display characteristics is provided. A two-dimensional code generator that generates a two-dimensional code based on generated information including display means, operation means, access information for accessing an external server, and game information related to a game. a means; Further, the game information includes mission achievement information relating to a certain mission, and the display means can display a mission achievement display suggesting that the certain mission has been achieved when the certain mission has been achieved. The two-dimensional code generation means can generate the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information even before the mission achievement display is displayed, and the display means can generate a certain action by the operation means. The two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information can be displayed based on the operation performed by the user. [Selection drawing] Fig. 34

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of game machines. Among such slot machines, there is a slot machine that displays information related to the operation of a stop button that leads to a stop mode that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2016-87308

However, the display performed by such gaming machines still leaves room for improvement.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine having a characteristic display.

A game machine according to the present invention is a two-dimensional code generator that generates a two-dimensional code based on generated information including display means, operation means, access information for accessing an external server, and game information related to a game. means, wherein the game information includes certain mission achievement information relating to a certain mission, and the display means, when a certain condition relating to the certain mission is satisfied , In a certain variable game after the next game change of the variable game in which the certain condition has been established, a mission achievement display suggesting that the certain condition has been established can be displayed, and the two-dimensional code generation means can display the certain condition . The two-dimensional code including the certain mission achievement information can be generated even before the variable game is started , and the display means can be operated by the operation means before the certain variable game is started. The game machine is capable of displaying the two-dimensional code including the certain mission achievement information based on a first operation by the game machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine with a characteristic display.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. (a) is a transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is for explaining the character accompanying state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; It is a diagram. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing characters displayed on the effect image display device in the character accompanying state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; (a) is a table schematically showing accompanying lottery processing in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; It is a table|surface which shows typically the CZ shift lottery process in an area normal state. (a) is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect example in the case of transitioning from a non-accompanied state to a non-accompanied state after transitioning from a non-accompanied state to a non-accompanied state in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; and (b) is a diagram showing a time chart when transitioning from the accompaniment state of two characters to the non-accompaniment state in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of an effect in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of an effect in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a table schematically showing character arrangement lottery processing in the CZ of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a selection in the CZ of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a table|surface which shows a character point lottery process typically, (c) is a table|surface which shows typically AT lottery process in CZ of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 4 is a table showing lottery probabilities of pressing order bells of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, maximum payout number in the case of correct operation, display mode and payout number for each operation content; It is an example of an effect in a predetermined game of CZ of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a table schematically showing accompanying lottery processing in the normal AT state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a normal AT state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; It is a table|surface which shows typically the number addition lottery process and the special zone lottery process in a state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart and effects of a game in which 123 additional coins are obtained by winning the pushing order bell_LCR in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect of a game in which an additional number of 231 coins is obtained by winning the pushing order bell_RLC in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart and effects of a game in which the push order bell _RCL is won in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, winning a prize, and obtaining 321 extra coins. (a) to (h) are diagrams showing screen transitions in the explanation display (embodiment 1) in accordance with the production situation in chronological order. (i) to (l) are diagrams showing screen transitions in the explanation display (embodiment 2) in accordance with the production situation in chronological order. It is the figure which showed the screen transition in the description display (Example 3) according to the production|presentation situation in chronological order. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of changes in display modes such as AT remaining G number display, number of earned medals display, and the like. It is the figure which showed the flow of the game in the priority of a stock (Example 1). It is a figure showing the flow of the game in the priority of the stock (Example 2). It is a diagram showing a game flow in stock priority (Example 3). (a) A table showing the lottery probability of the pressing order bell of the present embodiment, the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the number of payouts corresponding to the operation contents of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the table described with reference to FIG. This is a modification. (b) A diagram schematically showing an outline of an AT lottery when winning the bell in order of pushing. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of changes in the game state, effects, etc., in a time series when the pressing order win (choice hit) is successful. (b) A diagram showing an example of a winning combination for which the additional lottery 1 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 1. FIG. (c) A diagram showing an example of winning combinations for which the additional lottery 2 is executed and winning probabilities of the additional lottery 2. FIG. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of a change in game state, an effect, etc., in a time series when the pressing order guessing (selecting guessing) fails. (b) A diagram showing an example of a winning combination for which an additional lottery 3 is executed and a winning probability of the additional lottery 3. FIG. (a) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of display of the acquired amount of value in chronological order. (h) A diagram showing an example of symbols constituting a blessing display SP, the number of acquired symbols, the initial display time, and the re-display time corresponding to each symbol. It is the figure which showed the structural example of the game system 10 which concerns on this embodiment. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing the flow up to login of the gaming system 10 in chronological order. (f) to (k) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from after login to viewing of intermediate progress in the gaming system 10. FIG. (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from after login to the end of game recording in the gaming system 10. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of two-dimensional code issuance before and after mission completion display in chronological order. (b) It is a diagram showing a modified example of two-dimensional code issuance before mission completion display in chronological order. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when there is no character corresponding to a birthday during a certain game period. (b) A diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when the birthday of a princess character is included in a certain game period. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when the birthday of the Tono character is included in a certain game period. (b) A diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when the birthday of an unreleased character is included in a certain game period. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the count alerting|reporting by a grand voice (custom voice), and alerting alerting|reporting. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of count alert|reporting by a voice (default voice). (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of a two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated. (g) to (j) are diagrams showing modifications of the two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment A]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. Note that the number of pay lines 114 is not limited to five lines, and may be one horizontal pay line in the middle. In addition, for example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right downward winning line, and the right upward winning line are set as valid winning lines. Alternatively, regardless of the number of bets, the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be electronically inserted (bet operation) by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. It means including

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating a stop button 137 (sometimes referred to as a left stop button), and operating a stop button 138 (sometimes referred to as a middle stop button). The middle reel 111 can be stopped by doing so, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating a stop button 139 (sometimes referred to as a right stop button).

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". In addition, in this embodiment, the stop operation and the operation order by the combination of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be abbreviated. For example, the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is "left", the left reel 110 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 is the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 is the third stop reel. It is sometimes written as "left-center-right". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as a effect device that executes effects described later. For example, operation navigation is executed to report information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The information display button 191 is an operation button for calling and operating a user menu (for example, a menu for setting various information for individual players). The information display button 191 is composed of a cross key button 191a and an OK button 191b. The cross key button 191a is a selection button used when the player selects one of a plurality of options. The cross key button 191a is composed of up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and the cursor can be moved in the direction of the arrow by operating the respective arrow keys. The OK button 191b is a button for confirming an option on which the cursor is positioned. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of information setting by the user menu, in the case of volume setting, light amount setting, etc., it is used in the character (stage) selection of the effect executed after winning the bonus prize. In this embodiment, the information display button 191 may be referred to as a cross button 191 .

The production button 192 is a button that becomes operable when executing an production prompting the operation of the button. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 192 is operated, as a response effect, an effect suggesting the provision of a privilege such as the number of extra coins in the AT is executed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the information display button 191 sensor, the performance button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . The information display button 191 sensor detects operation of the information display button 191 , and the effect button 192 sensor detects operation of the effect button 192 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 inputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like through the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 425 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each of the above-described reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 1 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 1 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the reels 110 to 112, respectively. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "bell" design, the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "watermelon" design, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "watermelon" design. "Seven 1" patterns are arranged respectively.

<Slot machine processing>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined. In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state (RT type game state), and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. I do. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

To give an overview of the internal winning probability of the winning combination, the internal winning probability of each combination is calculated by using the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each combination as a random value acquired during the internal lottery, which will be described later. is obtained by dividing by numerical data (65536 in this embodiment) within the range of . The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation, for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control is performed to shift the game state (RT system game state, AT system game state). do. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 6(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 6A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 7(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 7A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability>
Next, the playability of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing an overall game flow, and is a transition diagram of game states (also called AT-type game states, hereinafter abbreviated as game states) relating to the effects of the main control unit 300. FIG.

· Advantageous Section/Non-advantageous Section First, the game state is broadly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. The non-advantageous section is the initial state, and is a period during which operation navigation cannot be executed. A non-advantageous section normal state exists in the non-advantageous section. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a period during which operation navigation can be performed. Here, the operation navigation is an effect that uses the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display device 127 to notify the content of the stop operation that helps the winning, and the order of stop operation and the timing of stop operation (internal winning combination Suggestion) is a production that informs. The advantageous section includes an advantageous section normal state, a challenge zone (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ), a normal AT state, a specialized zone, a pullback chance zone, and an ending state. In the present embodiment, the non-advantageous section normal state, the advantageous section normal state, and the CZ are collectively referred to as "normal state". Also, the normal AT state, the specialized zone, the withdrawal chance zone, and the ending state are collectively referred to as "AT state".

Regarding the state transition between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section, if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section normal state (for example, based on the winning hand of the winning combination internal lottery process, it is not lost), the advantageous section normal state (see route R1 in FIG. 8(a)). On the other hand, when the AT state of the advantageous section ends, the state shifts to the non-advantageous section normal state of the non-advantageous section (see route R2 in FIG. 8A). However, even if the AT state ends, there may be cases where the transition to the non-advantageous section does not occur (for example, when the AT state ends and transitions to the advantageous section normal state). Note that the AT state of the present embodiment is a difference number management type AT state, and when the number of difference sheets in the AT state reaches a specified number of sheets, the AT state ends. Here, the number difference means the difference between the number of game media (for example, medals) paid out and the number of game media inserted.

- Character Accompanying State Note that in the present embodiment, the game state can be classified from the viewpoint of which character accompanies the main character (Ten). Hereinafter, this game state will be referred to as a character accompanying state. In the character accompaniment state, there is a "non-accompaniment state" in which only the lord appears in the production, a "princess accompaniment state" in which the princess accompanies the lord and appears in the production, and a "grandpa" who appears in the production with the lord. There is a state where the old man accompanies the princess, and a state where the princess and the old man appear in the production accompanied by the lord. The princess accompanying state, the grandpa accompanying state, and the grandpa & princess accompanying state are also collectively referred to as "accompanying state". In this embodiment, the accompanying state is more advantageous for the player than the non-accompaniing state. For example, the probability of shifting from the current game state to a more advantageous game state is set high (for example, the transition from the advantageous section normal state to the CZ state, the transition from the CZ to the AT state, the AT state to the special zone high probability of transition to ), or set so that the continuation of an advantageous gaming state is longer (for example, AT is added and the end condition of AT state is set more advantageously), special Such effects (for example, a corresponding role winning notification effect that is executed when the corresponding role of the accompanying character, which will be described later, is won) are executed.

FIG. 9 shows characters displayed on the effect image display device 157 in each character accompanying state. Specifically, FIG. 9(a) shows the character in the non-accompanied state, FIG. 9(b) shows the character in the princess accompanying state, FIG. 9(c) shows the character in the grandpa accompanying state, and FIG. & Shows the character in the state of accompanying the princess.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the character accompanying state exists in the advantageous zone normal state, CZ, and normal AT state. FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the game state and the character accompanying state shown in FIG. 8(a). For example, in the normal state of the advantageous section, there are a non-accompanied state, a princess accompanying state, an old accompanying state, and an old man & princess accompanying state, and a CZ has a princess accompanying state and an old accompanying state. The normal AT state includes a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an old man accompanying state, and an old man & princess accompanying state. However, the character accompanying state may be set in a game state other than the advantageous section normal state, CZ, or normal AT state. For example, the character accompanying state may be set in the ending state. In this case, if the character corresponding to the accompanying character, which will be described later, is won in the ending state, a setting suggesting effect suggesting a set value may be executed, or the probability of executing the effect may be increased.

· Advantageous section normal state In the advantageous section normal state, the CZ shift lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the CZ state is executed every game. If the CZ shift lottery is won, the advantageous section normal state is shifted to CZ (see route R3 in FIG. 8A). As a rare case, if a special condition is met (for example, if you win a rare role, etc.), from the normal state of the advantageous section to the AT state directly without going through the CZ state from the normal state of the advantageous section There is a case of transition (see route R4 in FIG. 8(a)).

FIG. 10(a) is a table schematically showing the accompanying lottery process (more specifically, the accompanying lottery table used in the accompanying lottery process) in the normal state of the advantageous section, and FIG. 10(b) shows the advantageous section. FIG. 10 is a table schematically showing CZ transition lottery processing in a normal state (more specifically, a CZ entry lottery table used for CZ transition lottery processing); FIG.

The accompanying lottery process is a lottery process for determining an accompanying character, and is executed every game. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, the accompanying lottery process is executed based on the winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. For example, when the watermelon is won, the old man is selected as the companion character with a selection rate of 25%, and when the chance wins, the old man is selected as the companion character with a selection rate of 100%. If the winner wins, the princess is selected as the companion character with a selection rate of 25%, and if the strong cherry wins, the princess is selected as the companion character with a selection rate of 100%.

Note that the initial character accompaniment state in the advantageous section normal state is the non-accompaniment state. In addition, once set companion state (for example, princess accompanying state, old man accompanying state, old man & princess accompanying state) is maintained for the guaranteed number of games (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), and the guaranteed number of games is maintained. Accompanying end lottery that is executed every game after the lapse In the accompanying state, it is determined whether the accompanying state ends or continues based on the results of the princess accompanying end lottery that ends the princess accompanying state and the grandpa accompanying ending lottery that ends the grandpa accompanying state. For example, the accompanying end lottery may be a lottery with a winning probability of 1/2 based on the bet operation or the start lever operation, or the accompanying state may be ended when the winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process is replay. . Also, in a state in which two characters are accompanying, that is, in a state in which an old man and a princess are accompanying, the accompanying state is regulated so that the accompanying state does not end two games in a row. This is a measure to reduce player disappointment. For example, in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, if the state of accompanying the old man ends in the N game, the state of accompanying the princess does not end in the N+1 game. Hereinafter, this regulation is also referred to as an accompanying termination regulation. In the present embodiment, the accompanying end regulation is set so that the accompanying state does not end after playing two games in succession, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if one accompaniment end lottery is won, it may be regulated not to win another accompany end lottery for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games).

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the present embodiment, accompanying characters and winning combinations are associated with each other. Specifically, the character associated with Watermelon and Chance Eye is Old Man, and the character associated with Weak Cherry and Strong Cherry is Princess. Hereinafter, the winning role associated with the accompanying character will be referred to as the "corresponding role of the accompanying character".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the CZ shift lottery process is executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. For example, in the non-accompanying state, the probability of winning CZ when watermelon or weak cherry is won is 0%, and the winning probability of CZ when winning chance or strong cherry is 2%. Also, for example, in the case of the old accompanying state, the probability of winning CZ when winning watermelon is 25%, the probability of winning CZ when winning the second chance is 55%, and winning weak cherry or strong cherry The probability of winning CZ when you do is 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10B, in the present embodiment, transition to CZ is easier in the accompanying state than in the non-accompaniing state. Also, even in the accompanying state, it is easier to transition to CZ in the accompanying state of two characters (old man & princess accompanying state) than in the accompanying state of one character (hime accompanying state, grandpa accompanying state). It has become. In addition, in the internal winning combination lottery process in the accompanying state, when the corresponding combination of the accompanying character is won, the transition to CZ is easier than when the other combination is won.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the corresponding role of the old man (watermelon, chance) in the state of accompanying the old man and moving to CZ, and the probability of winning the corresponding role of the princess (weak cherry, strong cherry) in the state of accompanying the princess The probability of moving to CZ with the It can be treated preferentially.

- Game Progress in Advantageous Section Normal State Next, the game progress in the advantageous section normal state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect example showing how the game progresses in chronological order in the case of shifting from the non-accompanied state to the accompanying state and then to the non-accompanied state.

In FIG. 11(a), since the accompanying lottery was won in the M+1 game (when the accompanying lottery was won based on the weak cherry winning; see FIG. 10(a)), the princess accompanying state is started from the M+1 game, and M+21. This shows the case where the guaranteed number of games in which the princess accompanies the princess has ended. Although the state of accompanying the princess is started from the M+1 game, the effect image display device 157 of the M+1 game is executing the precursor effect of accompanying the princess (for example, the princess appears only half on the screen. See FIG. 11(a-1)). As described above, the character accompaniment state and the effect state on the effect image display device 157 do not necessarily match. It should be noted that even if the princess accompaniment portent effect is being executed in the effect image display device 157, the character accompaniment state is the princess accompany state, so the CZ shift lottery is performed based on the princess accompany state (FIG. 10 ( b) see). However, when the precursor effect is being executed, the CZ shift lottery may be performed based on the non-accompanying state.

In addition, in FIG. 11(a), since the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state has ended in the M+21 game, the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) starts from the M+22 game, and the accompanying end lottery (Princess accompanying end lottery) starts in the M+23 game. This shows the case where the non-accompaniment state is started from the M+23rd game because the princess has won the lottery for completing the accompaniment of the princess. In the M+22nd game, since the accompaniment end lottery (princess accompaniment end lottery) was not won, an image of the princess accompaniment state is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see FIG. 11(a-2)), and M+23 As for the game item, since the accompaniment end lottery (princess accompaniment end lottery) was won, a blackout image is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the accompaniment end lottery (see FIG. 11(a-3)). , an image of the non-accompanying state is displayed (see FIG. 11(a-4)).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the accompanying state ends, the accompanying character is erased via the blackout or whiteout end image, and then the non-accompaniing state image is displayed. The player can be made to clearly recognize that the state of accompanying the character has changed. It should be noted that the transition from the image of the accompanied state to the image of the non-accompanied state is not limited to this method. Alternatively, when the companion state ends, the stage may be changed to clearly notify that the character companion state has been changed.

FIG. 11(b) is a time chart showing in chronological order how the game progresses when the two characters transition from the accompanying state to the non-accompaniing state.

FIG. 11(b) shows that after the N game in the state of accompanying the princess (remaining 20 games), the accompanying lottery was won in the N+1 game (when the accompanying lottery was won based on the watermelon winning. FIG. 10(a) )), the state of accompanying the old man and the princess is started from the N+1 game, the guaranteed number of games of the princess accompanying state ends at the N+21 game, and the guaranteed number of games of the grandpa accompanying state ends at the N+22 game. there is

In addition, in FIG. 11(b), since the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state has ended in the N+21 game, the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started from the N+22 game, and the accompanying end lottery is started in the N+22 game. Since the player won the lottery for ending the princess accompanying the princess, the N+22th game shows the case where the grandpa is accompanying the princess.

In addition, in FIG. 11(b), since the guaranteed number of games in the state of accompanying the old man has ended in the N+22 game, the accompanying end lottery (older accompanying end lottery) is started from the N+23 game, and the accompanying end lottery is started in the N+23 game. It shows a case where the (grandfather end lottery) is won, but the grandpa state is maintained due to the above-mentioned companion termination regulation. However, since he won the accompaniment end lottery (grand accompaniment end lottery) of the N+24th game of the next game, the grandpa accompaniment state is ended, and the non-accompaniment state is started in the N+24th game. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely discouraged because the accompaniment state is restricted from ending over two consecutive games.

Effect of Advantageous Section Normal State Next, the effect of the advantageous section normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. FIGS. 12 and 13 show examples of effects in one predetermined game in the normal state of the advantageous section.

FIG. 12(a) shows the performance image display device 157 in the case where a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of a game in a non-accompanied state (see the character in FIG. 12(a-1)) and a weak cherry is won. It is an example of an image displayed. According to the effect example shown in FIG. 12(a), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (see FIG. 12(a-2)). See image d1), after the third stop operation, based on the winning of the weak cherry, a weak cherry winning notification effect for notifying the winning of the weak cherry is executed (see image d2 in FIG. 12(a-3)).

FIG. 12(b) shows the performance image display device 157 in the case where a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 12(b-1)) and a weak cherry is won. It is an example of an image displayed. According to the effect example shown in FIG. 12(b), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (see FIG. 12(b-2)). (see image d1), after the third stop operation, based on the winning of the weak cherry, a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed (see image d2 in FIG. 12 (b-3)) and dedicated to the princess accompanying state. (See image d3 in FIG. 12(b-3). For example, unlike the stopped state, the princess has a smiling expression d3). In this manner, when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect is executed to suggest that the accompanying character (princess) wins the corresponding role (weak cherry). In the state of accompanying the princess, the strong cherry is also a corresponding role of the accompanying character, so if the strong cherry wins in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state, and the strong cherry wins, the image d3 is displayed and the accompanying character is accompanied. A matching combination win notification effect (see image d3 in FIG. 12(b-3)) suggesting that the character will win the corresponding combination (strong cherry) is executed.

As a result, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the weak cherry or the strong cherry in the state of accompanying the princess, that is, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character can recognize that a special performance has been executed and that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the companion character by executing the corresponding role winning notification performance. Also, for players who know that it is advantageous to win a weak cherry or a strong cherry in the state of accompanying the princess, that is, to a player who knows that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character In addition, by executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to emphasize that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role, and to drive the player's willingness to play the game.

FIG. 12(c) is displayed on the effect image display device 157 when watermelon is won and watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 12(c-1)). This is an example image. According to the effect example shown in FIG. 12(c), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (FIG. 12(c-2) See image d1), after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification effect for notifying watermelon winning is executed based on the watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 12(c-3)). Since Suika is not the corresponding role of the accompanying character in the princess accompanying state, unlike FIG.

13(a) is displayed on the effect image display device 157 when watermelon is won and watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandpa accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 13(a-1)). This is an example image. According to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 13(a), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (see FIG. 13(a-2)). (see image d1), after the third stop operation, based on the watermelon winning, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 13(a-3)), and watermelon winning exclusively for grandpa accompanying state is executed. A notification effect is executed (see image d5 in FIG. 13(a-3), for example, image d5 in which the old man has a smiling expression, unlike the stopped state). In this way, when the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, the corresponding role winning notification effect (see image d5 in FIG. 13(a-3)) suggesting that the accompanying character's corresponding role (watermelon) is won is displayed. It should be noted that, in the state of accompanying the old man, since the second chance is also a corresponding role of the accompanying character, the image d5 is also displayed when the player wins the second chance in the internal lottery process for the winning combination of the game in the state of accompanying the old man and wins the second chance. Then, a corresponding role winning notification presentation suggesting that the companion character wins the corresponding role (chance number) is executed.

As a result, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the watermelon or the chance eye in the state of accompanying the old man, that is, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character By executing the corresponding role winning notification performance, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special performance has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the companion character. Also, for a player who knows that it is advantageous to win a watermelon or a chance eye in the accompanying state, that is, a player who knows that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character can drive the player's willingness to play by emphasizing that the companion character has won the corresponding role by executing the corresponding role winning notification effect.

FIG. 13(b) shows an effect image display device in the case where a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess (see the character in FIG. 13(b-1)) and the weak cherry wins. 157 is an example image displayed. According to the effect example shown in FIG. 13(b), based on the start operation, a light cherry/watermelon winning suggestion effect suggesting winning of either light cherry or watermelon is executed (see FIG. 13(b-2)). image d1), based on the third stop operation and the winning of the weak cherry, a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed to notify the winning of the weak cherry (see image d2 in FIG. 13(b-3)), and the state of accompanying the old man and the princess. Executes a dedicated weak cherry winning notification effect (see image d3 and image d5 in FIG. 12(b-3). For example, unlike when the old man and the princess are in the stopped state, the image d3 shows the princess smiling. and an image d5) in which the old man has a smiling expression. In this way, when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in the accompanying state, the corresponding role winning notification effect ((image in FIG. 12 (b-3) d3 and image d5) is executed.In addition, in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, since the high cherry, the chance eye, and the watermelon are also corresponding characters of the accompanying character, the high winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the state of the old man and the princess is executed. If Cherry, Chance, or Watermelon is won, and if Cherry, Chance, or Watermelon is won, image d3 and image d5 are displayed to suggest that the companion character's corresponding role (Strong Cherry, Chance, or Watermelon) is won. Executes the matching winning notification presentation.

FIG. 13(c) shows the performance image display device 157 when watermelon is won and watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the state of accompanying the old man and princess (see the character in FIG. 13(c-1)). It is an example of an image displayed. According to the production example shown in FIG. 13(c), based on the start operation, a low cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production suggesting winning of either low cherry or watermelon is executed (FIG. 13(c-2) Image d1), based on the watermelon winning after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. (See image d3 and image d5 in FIG. 12(c-3). For example, unlike the stopped state of the old man and the princess, the image d3 and the old man are smiling. has a smiling expression d5). In this way, when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in the accompanying state, the corresponding role winning notification effect (image d3 in FIG. 12 (c-3) and image d5) is executed.

In this way, the player who does not know that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance, weak cherry or strong cherry in the state of accompanying the old man and princess, that is, it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. For players who do not know the corresponding character, the execution of the corresponding role winning notification effect is executed to make them recognize that the special effect has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding character of the accompanying character. can be made In addition, a player who knows that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance, weak cherry or strong cherry in the state of accompanying the old man and princess, that is, it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. For the player who knows, by executing the corresponding role winning notification performance, the fact that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role can be emphasized and the player's willingness to play can be stimulated. In particular, the state in which two characters are accompanying is more advantageous than the state in which one character is accompanying (see FIG. 10(b)). If so, the interest of the player can be further enhanced. In addition, in the state of accompanying the old man and the princess, the image d3 displayed in the corresponding role notification effect in the princess accompanying state and the image d5 displayed in the corresponding role notification effect in the princess accompanying state are displayed as the corresponding role winning notification effect. However, not only the images d3 and d5, but also images that are only displayed when the old man and the princess are accompanying may be displayed.

・CZ
CZ is a game state in which points are to be obtained during a predetermined period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment). After the end of a predetermined period, CZ executes an AT lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the normal AT state based on the total value of points acquired during the predetermined period. If the AT lottery process is won in the CZ, the AT normal state is entered (see route R5 in FIG. 8(a)), and if the AT lottery process is not won, the advantageous section normal state is entered ( See route R3 in FIG. 8(a)). FIG. 14(c) is a table schematically showing the AT lottery process (more specifically, an AT lottery table for each point used in the AT lottery process).

As shown in FIG. 14(c), in this embodiment, when the total value of points acquired in the period of 20 games is 500 points or 0 to 50 points, the probability is 100%, that is, the AT state is certain. It is designed to migrate. Also, in the case of 51 points or more, the higher the total number of points acquired toward 500 points, the higher the probability of shifting to the AT state.

The character accompaniment state of CZ is determined by executing an accompany lottery process at the time of transition from the advantageous section normal state. The determined companion character is the same for the period of 20 games. Specifically, in the accompanying lottery process, either the princess or the grandpa is determined, so the princess accompanying state or the grandpa accompanying state is set and the CZ is started (see FIG. 8(b)). In other words, in CZ, the non-accompanied state and the grandpa & princess accompanying state are not set.

A mechanism for giving points to CZ in the accompanying state set in this way will be described with reference to FIGS. Incidentally, FIG. 16 shows an example of an effect in one predetermined game of CZ.

In CZ, a character corresponding to each reel is determined by character arrangement lottery processing at the time of betting operation for each game. FIG. 14A is a table schematically showing the character arrangement lottery process (more specifically, the character arrangement pattern lottery table used for the character arrangement lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 80% and pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 20%. When pattern 1 is selected, the left reel 110 is associated with a non-accompanied character, the center reel 111 is associated with a lord, and the right reel 112 is associated with an accompanying character. On the other hand, when pattern 2 is selected, Shinobu is associated with the left reel 110 , Tono is associated with the middle reel 111 , and Accompanying Character is associated with the right reel 112 . That is, in either case, the companion character set in the character arrangement lottery process is associated with the right reel 112 . For example, in the game shown in FIG. 16(a), pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (see FIG. 16(a-1)). Note that the game shown in FIG. 16(b) and the game shown in FIG. 16(c) also show a case where pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (FIG. 16 ( b-1), see FIG. 16(c-1)).

In the game of CZ after such character arrangement, if the push order bell is internally won and the content of the first stop operation matches the content of the notification of the operation navigation, it is associated with the first stop reel of the game. You can earn a number of points based on your character.

Here, first, the pushing order bell of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 15 . FIG. 15 is a table showing the lottery probability of the pressing order bell, the number of payouts in the case of a correct operation, the display mode and the number of payouts for each operation content, according to the present embodiment. The pressing order of the bell is composed of multiple combinations, and if the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination differs according to the contents of the stop operation (for example, the order of the stop operation), and the number of payouts also differs. is configured to The maximum payout number is given when the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Note that (1) the left, middle, and right stop operations are LCR operations, (2) the left, right, center stop operations are LRC operations, (3) the center, left, and right stop operations are CLR operations, and (4) the center, right, left stop operations are CRL operations. , (5) right-center stop operation may be referred to as RLC operation, and (6) right-center-left stop operation may be referred to as RCL operation.

The push order bell of the present embodiment includes (1) a push order bell _LCR for which the LCR operation is the correct operation, (2) a push order bell _LRC for which the LRC operation is the correct operation, and (3) a CLR operation as the correct operation. (4) Push order Bell_CRL with CRL operation as the correct operation, (5) Push order Bell_RLC with RLC operation as the correct operation, (6) RCL operation as the correct operation It is subdivided into six parts of push order bell_RCL. For example, when the push order bell_LCR is internally won and the LCR operation is performed, when the LCR operation which is the correct stop operation is performed, 6 medals are paid out and the push order bell_CRL is internally won. However, if the CRL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals are paid out, and an internal winning is made in the push order Bell_RCL, and if the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals medals are paid out.

In addition, in CZ, when an internal win is made for the push order bell, operation navigation is executed. Therefore, in the game in which the CZ push order bell is internally won, if the stop operation of the correct answer according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the maximum payout number that can be given in the game can be obtained and the first stop It is possible to acquire the number of points of the character associated with the reel. Here, the number of points based on the character (hereinafter also referred to as the selected character) associated with the first stop reel is determined by the selected character point lottery process. FIG. 14B is a table schematically showing the selected character point lottery process (more specifically, a point lottery table for each selected character used in the selected character point lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14B, when the selected character is a non-accompanied character, 25 points are awarded with a selection probability of 80%, and 55 points are awarded with a selection probability of 20%. . Also, if the selected character is an accompanying character, there is a 10% chance that 25 points will be awarded, a 45% chance that 55 points will be awarded, a 35% chance that 100 points will be awarded, and a 10% chance that 100 points will be awarded. 200 points are awarded with a probability of

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the present embodiment, the selected character is higher than the non-accompanied character (expected point value of 31) when the selected character is Lord or Shinobu (both expected point values are 61.25). The expected value of points to be acquired is higher when the selected character is an accompanying character (expected point value is 82.25) than when the selected character is a lord or a shinobi. The value is set to be large. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is easy to obtain high points when the selected character is the accompanying character. In other words, the expected value of points obtained when winning the push order Bell_RCL or the push order Bell_RCL, which is the push order bell whose correct answer is the first stop operation right, is increased when the first stop reel is set to the right. is set.

・CZ production Fig. 16(a) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, and the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord with the middle reel 111, and the princess with the right reel 112). This is an example of an effect in the case where the player is internally selected for the push order bell_CRL and the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification contents of the operation navigation. Shows the effect when selected. That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14(b), the selected character is Tono and the point number of 55 with a selection rate of 55% is selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the betting operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation effect image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, FIG. 16A -2), the number 312 is displayed according to the position of the corresponding reel based on the order of the correct stop operation.The number of the first stop operation is displayed larger than the number of other stop operations), After the first stop operation, the number of points acquired along with the selected character is displayed (for example, characters such as 55Pt are displayed along with the image of the buttocks), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in CZ is displayed. (For example, display such as 55Pt on the upper right of the screen).

FIG. 16(b) shows the state of accompanying the princess (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, and the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord with the middle reel 111, and the princess with the right reel 112). state), the press order Bell_RCL is internally won, and the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification content of the operation navigation, and 200 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. shows the performance of That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14B, the selected character is Hime (accompanied character), and the effect is shown when the number of points of 200 with a selection rate of 10% is selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the betting operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation effect image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, FIG. 16 (b -2), the number 321 is displayed according to the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation.The number of the first stop operation is displayed larger than the number of the other stop operations), After the first stop operation, the number of points acquired with the selected character is displayed (for example, characters such as "get 200 points" are displayed with the image of the princess), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in CZ (For example, 200Pt is displayed on the upper right of the screen).

FIG. 16(c) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, and the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord with the middle reel 111, and the princess with the right reel 112). state), the press order bell_LCR is internally won, and the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification contents of the operation navigation, and 25 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. shows the performance of That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14(b), the selected character is an old man (a non-accompanied character), and the effect is shown when the point number of 25 with a selection rate of 80% is selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the betting operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation effect image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, FIG. 16 (b -2), according to the stop operation of the correct answer, the number 123 is displayed according to the position of the corresponding reel.The number of the first stop operation is displayed larger than the number of other stop operations), the first stop After the operation, the number of points acquired along with the selected character is displayed (for example, characters such as "get 25 points" are displayed along with the image of the old man), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in CZ is displayed. (For example, 250Pt is displayed on the upper right of the screen).

In FIG. 16, a game in which the push-order bell was internally won in the CZ was explained. Corresponding characters are displayed in an array, but points are not given because the selected character point lottery process is not executed.

Also, in the above description, CZ is a fixed period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), but it is not limited to this. For example, when a rare combination is won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the game period of CZ may be extended, or the number of games may not be counted.

・Normal AT state As an initial state, the normal AT state is set to end when the difference number of sheets in the AT state reaches the initial ending difference number of sheets (for example, 300 sheets per set in this embodiment). there is In the normal AT state, each game, a number addition lottery process for adding the number to the initial ending difference number and a specialized zone lottery process for determining whether to shift to the specialized zone are executed. When winning the number addition lottery, the number determined by the number addition lottery is added to the initial ending difference number. This added difference number is referred to as the end difference number of addition. In the normal AT state, the normal AT state ends when the difference number of sheets reaches the initial ending difference number of sheets or the additional ending difference number of sheets.
When the normal AT state ends, it shifts to the withdrawal chance zone (see route R6 in FIG. 8(a)). Also, when winning the specialized zone lottery process in the normal AT state, the player moves to the specialized zone (see route R7 in FIG. 8A). The special zone is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily add the number of coins, and the additional number given in the special zone is added to the end difference number of the addition. Also, when the difference number of sheets in the normal AT state is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment), the state shifts to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 8A).

FIG. 17A is a table schematically showing the companion lottery process in the normal AT state (more specifically, the companion lottery table used in the companion lottery process), and the companion lottery process determines the companion character. This is lottery processing. The contents of the companion lottery table shown in FIG. 17(a) are the same as the contents of the companion lottery table in the normal state of the advantageous section, so the description is omitted. That is, in the present embodiment, the companion character and the winning combination are associated even in the normal AT state. It should be noted that the initial character accompaniment state, which is familiar with the normal AT state, is the non-accompaniment state.

FIG. 17(b) shows the number addition lottery process and the special zone lottery process (more specifically, the number addition selection table used for the number addition lottery process and the special zone lottery table used for the special zone lottery process). ) is a table schematically showing. The number-adding lottery process and the specialized zone lottery process are executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process, respectively. For example, in the number addition lottery process, in the case of a non-accompaniment state, when the watermelon or weak cherry is internally won, the number is added with a winning probability of 1%, and when the chance or strong cherry is internally won, the number is added with a probability of 10%. The number of tickets will be added according to the probability of winning. In addition, for example, in the lottery process for adding the number of tickets, in the case of the grandpa accompanying state, when the watermelon is internally won, the number of tickets is added with a winning probability of 20%, and when the internal winning is made at the second chance, the number of tickets is added with a winning probability of 40%. When the weak cherry is internally elected, the number of coins is added with a winning probability of 1%, and when the strong cherry is internally elected, the number of coins is added with a winning probability of 10%. It should be noted that the additional number of sheets given in the number addition lottery process is a predetermined number (for example, 20 sheets, 50 sheets, etc.).

Further, for example, in the special zone lottery process, in the case of non-accompaniment, when watermelon or weak cherry is internally won, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 0.5% and internally wins second chance or strong cherry. When you do, you will move to a special zone with a 1% chance of winning. Further, for example, in the special zone lottery process, in the case of the princess accompanying state, when the watermelon is internally won, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 0.5%, and when the watermelon is internally won at the chance, the player moves to the special zone with a winning probability of 1%. Moves to the specialized zone with a winning probability, and moves to the specialized zone with a winning probability of 5% when internally winning a weak cherry, and moves to a specialized zone with a winning probability of 10% when internally winning a strong cherry. do.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the present embodiment, the accompanying state has a higher probability of adding the number of sheets than the non-accompaniing state, and the transition to the specialized zone is facilitated. . In addition, in the internal winning combination lottery process in the companion state, if you win the corresponding role of the companion character, the probability of adding the number of cards is higher than if you win other roles. making it easier to transition to Even in the accompanied state, the probability of adding the number of characters is higher when two characters are accompanied than when one character is accompanied, and the transition to the specialized zone is facilitated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the number-adding lottery process or the special zone lottery process by winning the grandpa's counterpart (watermelon, chance) in the grandpa accompanying state, and the princess's counterpart in the princess accompanying state ( The probability of winning the lottery process for adding the number of cards or the special zone lottery process by winning the weak cherry, strong cherry) is the same, but if it is not the same and you win the corresponding role of the accompanying character in the same accompanying state may be treated more favorably than the case of winning the corresponding role of the companion character in other accompanying states.

Retraction Chance Zone A withdrawal chance zone is a gaming state during a predetermined period (for example, 30 games in this embodiment) in which there is a possibility of returning to the normal AT state. In the pullback chance zone, an AT pullback lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to return to the normal AT state. When winning the AT withdrawal lottery process during a predetermined period, the state shifts to the normal AT state (see route R6 in FIG. 8(a)). shifts to the non-advantageous section normal state (see route R2 in FIG. 8(a)). The AT withdrawal lottery may be determined, for example, based on the winning combination in the internal winning combination lottery process. The withdrawal chance zone is a game state in which the execution frequency of operation navigation is lower than in the normal AT state.

・Ending state When the difference number of sheets in the AT state is equal to or greater than a first threshold value (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment), the normal AT state is shifted to the ending state (see path R8 in FIG. 8A). ). In the ending state, it is a game state in which the number addition is not executed. Also, in the ending state, when the difference number of sheets in the AT state reaches the second threshold value (for example, 2400 sheets in the case of the present embodiment), the ending state is ended, and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section normal state (FIG. 8 (see route R2 in (a)).

Special Zone The special zone consists of a predetermined game period (for example, 5 games in the case of the present embodiment), and is a game state in which it is easy to add the number of games. When the additional number of sheets is provided in the specialized zone, the added number of sheets is added to the end difference number of additional sheets. When all the games in the specialized zone have been played, the state shifts to the normal AT state (see route R7 in FIG. 8(a)). In the specialized zone, if you win an internal winning push order bell, and you win an internally won push order bell, a number indicating the operation order (more specifically, a three-digit number notified by the operation navigation. For example, push order bell_LCR) In the case of , the number of sheets in 123) becomes the additional number of sheets as it is. In addition, in a game in which the bell is internally won in the pressing order in the special zone, a freeze is generated before the operation navigation is generated so as to improve the player's sense of expectation. Freeze is a standby state for delaying the acceptance timing of the next operation. During the freeze period, the reels 11 to 112 do not start rotating even if the start lever 135 is operated, or the stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted. The player's operation is not accepted, such as whether or not there is any. The production during the freeze period is referred to as a freeze production. Note that the freeze time of the present embodiment has a plurality of time patterns, and there is a tendency that the longer the freeze time is, the more the additional number of sheets is increased.

Rendering of Specialized Zone The rendering of the specialized zone will be described below with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. In FIGS. 18 to 20, the upper stage is a time chart showing the progress of one predetermined game in the specialized zone, and the lower stage is the mode and effect image of the reels 110 to 112 at each point in the upper time chart. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation displayed on the display apparatus 157. FIG.

FIG. 18 shows a game in which the pressing order bell_LCR is won in the specialized zone, the LCR operation is performed, the upper bell is won, and 123 extra coins are obtained. FIG. 18 shows a case where the reels 110 to 112 are started based on the start lever operation (start operation) and freeze occurs, and the freeze ends after a predetermined time t1. In FIG. 18, time point a-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point a-2 is the time point during the freeze after the start operation, time point a-3 is the time point when operation navigation is started, and time point a-4 is the end time of the freeze. The time point a-5 is the start time point at which the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated. The time point a-5 is the time point at which the cross button 191 can be accepted. Time a-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time a-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time a-9 is the time when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 18, first, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating based on the start operation (see time point a-1 in the upper and lower stages), and the effect image display device 157 displays: An image of Mr. Tono's disappointment is displayed (see time point a-1 in the lower row). In other words, although it is actually frozen, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and the effect image display device 157 displays an image that you feel regretful, causing the player to freeze. It can be misleading if you don't. Next, at time a-2 during freezing, the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, but none of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the effect button 191, and the cross button 192 are in a state in which they cannot be operated (time point a-2 in the upper row). a-2). Therefore, setting operations such as volume setting and light intensity setting are also impossible during the freeze. In addition, the effect image display device 157 displays an image indicating that the game is frozen and button operation is disabled (see time point a-2 in the lower row).

Next, at time point a-3, operation navigation is started although it is frozen (see time point a-3 in the upper row), and an image of operation navigation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (time point a in the lower row). -3). In the game shown in FIG. 18, since the pressing order Bell_LCR is won, specifically, the number 123 indicating the LCR operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, when the freeze ends at time a-4, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be stopped (see time a-4 in the upper row). a-6), the left reel 110 stops, and the effect image display device 157 displays an operation navigation image after the first stop operation (see time point a-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point a-7 in the upper row), and a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 139 (see time point a-8 in the upper row). Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time point a-9 in the upper and lower stages), and the effect image indicating the number of additional reels is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point a-9 in the lower stage). ). Specifically, in the game shown in FIG. 18, 123 cards are added based on the 123 numbers notified by the operation navigation.

As mentioned above, according to the game shown in FIG. (because it is not accepted), it will be recognized that it is being frozen. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a surprise, and to improve the sense of anticipation of the addition. Further, since the operation navigation is executed after the freeze and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Further, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is in the unacceptable state, it is possible to prevent the stop button 138 from being erroneously operated.

FIG. 19 shows a game in which the pressing order bell_RLC is won in the specialized zone, the RLC operation is performed, the lower bell is won, and 231 extra coins are obtained. In FIG. 19, freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is waiting, and after a predetermined time t2 (> predetermined time t1), the freezing ends and the reels 110 to 112 shows the case where rotation starts. In FIG. 19, time point b-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point b-2 is the time point during the freeze after the start operation, and the time point b-3 is the start time point when the operation of the effect button 192 can be accepted. After time point b-2, the time point b-4 is the time point when the operation reception of the effect button 192 becomes impossible, the time point b-4 is the time point when the freeze ends, the time point when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the cross button 191 and the effect button 192. , time b-5 is the start time when operation acceptance for the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and the time when operation navigation is started, time b-6 is the time of the first stop operation. , time b-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time b-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time b-9 is the time when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 19, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, the reels 110 to 112 are in a wait state (see time point b-1 in the upper and lower stages), and the first button operation promotion effect is executed. Then, the initial image d21 of the first button operation promotion effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point b-1 in the lower row). The first button operation prompting effect is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 192 (for example, the effect image display device 157 displays the image of the meter and a message such as "Press the button repeatedly to fill the meter!"). , It is a production that ends with the passage of time. It should be noted that, at time point b-1, it is not possible to accept an operation for the effect button 192 (see time point b-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time point b-2, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the effect button 192 (see time point b-2 in the upper row), and when the effect button 192 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays the first button. An image d22 of an operation promotion rendering is displayed (see point b-2 in the lower row). The image d22 is an image indicating an operation prompt (for example, an image prompting a button operation with words such as "Collect the meter by repeatedly hitting the button!"), an image indicating an operation response (for example, an an image in which the value of the meter rises) and an image indicating the effective period of operation of the effect button 192 (for example, an image of a gauge indicating the time during which the operation of the effect button 192 is valid).

Here, since the first button operation promoting effect is a effect that ends after a predetermined period of time has passed, the player is more likely to overlook it than the effect that does not end after a predetermined period of time has passed. There is However, in the present embodiment, since the first button operation promoting effect is executed during freezing, the player does not overlook the first button operation promoting effect and allows the player to concentrate on the first button operation promoting effect. At the same time, a special feeling can be given, and the game can be livened up.

That is, during execution of the first button operation promotion effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operation on the cross button 191, operation on the start lever 135, operation on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation on the settlement button 134, etc.) are invalidated, so that the player does not overlook the first button operation promotion performance and allows the player to concentrate on the first button operation promotion performance. can be made

Next, at time point b-3, when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the effect button 192 again (see time point b-3 in the upper row), the second button operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the second 2 button operation promotion effect image d23 is displayed (see time point b-1 in the lower row). The second button operation promotion effect is an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192 again (for example, the effect image display device 157 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect button 192 together with the image of the full meter). The second button operation promotion effect is an effect that does not end with the lapse of time, and is an effect that ends when the effect button 192 is operated.

Next, at time point b-4, the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the operation reception of the effect button 192 becomes impossible, and the operation of the effect button 192 is performed (upper and lower At the time point b-4), the second button operation prompting effect ends, and the effect image d12 indicating the number of additional coins is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see the time point b-4 at the bottom). Specifically, in the game shown in FIG. 19, an image showing 231 additional cards is displayed based on the number 231 notified by the operation navigation to be executed thereafter.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 192 whose operation is prompted by the second button operation promoting effect started in the freeze state is started after the freeze state ends. In this embodiment, two button operation promotion effects (first button operation promotion effect, second button operation promotion effect) are started during freezing, so the freeze state becomes long and the effect becomes redundant. It may become a thing. Therefore, the second button operation promotion effect executed after the first button operation promotion effect is started during the freeze, but the operation effective period of the effect button 192 to be operated is after the freeze ends. I am trying to start. This prevents the freeze state from prolonging and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation prompting effect.

Next, at time point b-5, when operation reception of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes possible and operation navigation is started (see time point b-5 in the upper row), the effect image display device 157 displays an operation navigation image. is displayed (see time point b-5 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 19, since the pressing order Bell_RLC is won, specifically, the number 231 indicating the RLC operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-6 in the upper row), the right reel 112 is stopped, and the effect image display device 157 displays the operation navigation image d11 after the first stop operation. is displayed (see time point b-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-7 in the upper row), and a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point b-8 in the upper row). Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see point b-9 in the upper row).

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 19, the freeze occurs at the same time as the start operation, so it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of cards will be increased in the game. In addition, since the number of additional coins is notified after the freeze, and operation navigation is executed after that, the player can grasp the content of the correct stop operation from the notified number of additional coins. Further, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is in the unacceptable state, it is possible to prevent the stop button 138 from being erroneously operated.

FIG. 20 shows a game in which the pressing order bell _RCL is won in the special zone, the RCL operation is performed, the lower bell is won, and 321 extra coins are obtained. In FIG. 20, freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is waiting, and after a predetermined time t3 (> predetermined time t2), the freezing ends and the reels 110 to 110 112 shows the case where rotation starts. In FIG. 20, time point c-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point c-2 is the time point during the freeze after the start operation, and the time point c-3 is the time point at which the effect button 192 can be operated. After time point c-2, this is the time point at which operation acceptance for the effect button 192 is disabled, the time point at which operation navigation is started, and time point c-4 is the time point at which the freeze ends, and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. and the start point at which the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the point c-5 is the start point at which the cross button 191 can be accepted, the point c-6 is the first stop operation, Time c-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time c-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time c-9 is the time when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 20, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, and the reels 110 to 112 are in the wait state (see time point c-1 in the upper and lower stages). An image d31 (for example, an image of a confrontation between a lord and a samurai, etc.) is displayed (see point c-1 at the bottom), and then an image d32 of a first button operation promotion effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157. be. The image d32 is an image indicating an operation promotion (for example, an image prompting a button operation with the words "Determine with one blow!") and an image indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 192 (for example, when the effect button 192 is operated image of a gauge showing valid time). The first button operation prompting effect is an operation prompting effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 192, and is an effect that ends with the lapse of time. It should be noted that, at time point c-1, it is not possible to accept an operation for the effect button 192 (see time point c-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time point c-2, it becomes possible to accept an operation for the effect button 192 (see time point c-2 in the upper row). The effect image display device 157 displays the image d32 of the first button operation promotion effect (see point c-2 in the lower part).

Here, since the first button operation promoting effect is a effect that ends after a predetermined period of time has passed, the player is more likely to overlook it than the effect that does not end after a predetermined period of time has passed. There is However, in the present embodiment, since the first button operation promoting effect is executed during freezing, the player does not overlook the first button operation promoting effect and allows the player to concentrate on the first button operation promoting effect. At the same time, a special feeling can be given, and the game can be livened up.

That is, during execution of the first button operation promotion effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operation on the cross button 191, operation on the start lever 135, operation on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation on the settlement button 134, etc.) are invalidated, so that the player does not overlook the first button operation promotion performance and allows the player to concentrate on the first button operation promotion performance. can be made

Next, at time point c-3, when the effect button 192 cannot be operated (see time point c-3 in the upper row), operation navigation is started (see time point c-3 in the upper row), and the effect image display device 157 , the operation navigation image d11 is displayed (see point c-3 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 20, since the pressing order Bell_RCL is won, specifically, the number 321 indicating the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In other words, the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 20 is an effect that is started during the freeze, and is also an operation promotion effect that prompts the user to operate the stop buttons 137 to 139, so it can be said to be the second button operation promotion effect. This second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) is a effect that does not end with the lapse of time, and is an effect that ends when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated.

Next, at time c-4, when the freeze ends, the reels 110-112 start rotating, and the stop buttons 137-139 can be stopped (see time c-4 in the upper and lower rows), and time c-5. Then, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the cross button 191 (see point c-5 in the upper row).

As described above, in this embodiment, the effective period of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 whose operation is prompted by the second button operation prompting effect (operation navigation) started in the freeze state starts after the freeze state ends. It's like In this embodiment, two button operation promotion effects (first button operation promotion effect, second button operation promotion effect) are started during freezing, so the freeze state becomes long and the effect becomes redundant. It may become a thing. Therefore, the second button operation promotion effect executed after the first button operation promotion effect is started during the freeze, but the operation effective period of the effect button 192 to be operated is after the freeze ends. I am trying to start. This prevents the freeze state from prolonging and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation prompting effect.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 139, the right reel 112 stops (see point c-6 in the upper row), and the effect image display device 157 displays the operation navigation image d11 after the first stop operation. is displayed (see point c-6 in the lower row).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point c-7 in the upper row), and a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point c-8 in the upper row). Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time point c-9 in the upper and lower stages), and the effect image d12 indicating the number of additional reels is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (time point c-9 in the lower stage). reference). In the game shown in FIG. 20, specifically, 321 cards are added based on the 321 numbers notified by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 20, since the freeze occurs with the start operation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of cards will be increased in the game. Further, since the operation navigation is executed after the freeze and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Further, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is in the unacceptable state, it is possible to prevent the stop button 138 from being erroneously operated.

19 and 20, the first button operation prompting effect described in FIG. 19 and FIG. It is a production that ends based on the passage of time. On the other hand, the second button operation prompting effect (operation navigation) described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 is a effect that does not end after a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, the first button operation prompting effect has a special feeling compared to the second button operation prompting effect, and the interest in the game can be improved. However, there is a concern that the player may easily overlook the first button operation promotion effect that ends based on the passage of time. 1 button operation promotion presentation is made to pay attention.

In addition, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the volume setting can be performed (the cross button 191 can be accepted) except during the freeze period, but the volume setting cannot be performed even during the game such as when the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. (The cross button 191 cannot be accepted), and the volume setting can be executed (the cross button 191 can be accepted) during a non-game period in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

<Overview of Embodiment A>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the embodiment A), game progress means (for example, the main control unit 300) for progressing the game, Effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) for executing effects based on instructions from the game progress means, and operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, effect button 192, Information display button 191, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and the game progress means can generate a freeze state to wait the progress of the game (for example, FIGS. 18 to 20 Freeze), the effect control means, the first operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 9 (b-2), FIG. 20 (c-2) first button operation promotion effect) can be executed, and after the freeze state is started by the game progress means, the first operation promotion effect may start (for example, FIG. 19 (b-2), FIG. 20(c-2)) is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, since the first operation promoting effect that may be terminated based on the lapse of the predetermined time in the frozen state is executed, the first operation promoting effect is not overlooked. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance and to make the player feel special.

In the first basic configuration, a preferred configuration 1 is that the effect control means is means for ending the first operation promoting effect started in the freeze state in the freeze state.

According to the preferred configuration 1, since the first operation promoting performance started in the frozen state ends in the frozen state, the player can be made to pay attention to the first operation promoting performance without overlooking the first operation promoting performance. It can make you feel special.

In the first basic configuration, preferred configuration 1, the operation means includes a first operation means (for example, effect button 192 etc.) capable of changing the effect being executed based on the operation, A preferred configuration 2 is that the first operation-promoting effect is an effect that prompts the user to operate the first operating means.

According to the preferred configuration 2, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, and to make the player feel special.

In the first basic configuration and the preferred configurations 1 and 2, the effect control means may provide a second operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. , the second button operation promotion effect in FIG. 20 (c-3)), and the effect control means ends the first operation promotion effect started after the freeze state is started. A preferred configuration 3 is that the second operation prompting effect may be started later in the freeze state (for example, FIG. 19(b-3), FIG. 20(c-3)).

According to the preferred configuration 3, since the second operation promoting effect that never ends is executed based on the elapse of the predetermined time in the freeze state, the second operation promoting effect is not overlooked. It is possible to draw the attention of the player and make the player feel special.

In preferred configuration 3, preferred configuration 4 is that the second operation-promoting effect is an effect that prompts the user to operate the first operating means (eg, FIG. 19(b-3)).

According to the preferred configuration 4, since two operation prompting effects for prompting the operation of the same operation means are continuously executed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation for the game.

In preferred configuration 3, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and a start operation means operated to start rotation of the plurality of reels (for example, , a start lever 135), and the operation means includes a second operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that receives a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels. A preferred configuration 5 is that the second operation prompting effect is an effect that prompts the stop operation of the second operating means (for example, FIG. 20(c-3)).

According to the preferred configuration 5, since two operation prompting effects for prompting the operation of different operation means are successively executed, it is possible to prompt the progress of the game and improve the expectation for the game.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, embodiment A), lottery means (for example, , main control unit 300, winning combination internal lottery processing), game state transition means for controlling the transition of the game state (e.g., main control unit 300, game state control processing), effect execution means (e.g., first sub control 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157, etc.), wherein the game state transition means is a first period (for example, advantageous section normal state) If the first transition condition is satisfied in the state (non-accompanying state) (for example, if you win a weak cherry or a strong cherry and win in the accompanying lottery process, FIG. 10 (a)), the second state ( For example, a state of accompanying a princess), and the second state when the lottery means wins the first role (for example, a weak cherry or a strong cherry) is the first state by the lottery means. It is a more advantageous state than the first state when winning a role (for example, CZ winning probability is high, FIG. When the first winning combination is won in the state, a first suggesting effect (for example, corresponding winning notification effect, image d3 in FIG. 12(b)) suggesting that the first winning combination has been won is displayed. On the other hand, if the first combination is won in the first state of the first period, the first suggestive effect is not executed (for example, there is no image d3 in FIG. 12(a) ), which is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, a player who does not know that the second state is an advantageous state if he/she wins the first role will not be able to win the first prize when he/she wins the first role. By executing the suggestive effect, a special feeling can be produced, and it is possible to suggest that the second state is an advantageous state if the first combination is won. In addition, for the player who knows that the second state is an advantageous state if he/she wins the first role, the first suggestion effect is executed when the first role is won. As a result, the player will not miss the fact that the player has won the first role, and the player will be thrilled.

In the second basic configuration, the game state transition means, when a second transition condition is satisfied in the first state of the first period (for example, winning a watermelon or a chance eye and accompanying lottery Fig. 10(a), when winning in the process, is means for shifting to a third state (e.g., accompanying state), and the second winning combination (e.g., watermelon or chance) is won by the lottery means. The third state in case is more advantageous than the first state when the second combination is won by the lottery means (for example, CZ winning probability is high, FIG. 10(b)) , If the second role is won in the third state of the first period, the effect execution means performs a second suggestion effect (for example, , the corresponding combination winning notification effect, image d5) of FIG. A preferred configuration 11 is to not execute the effect.

According to the preferred configuration 11, for a player who does not know that the third state is an advantageous state when winning the second role, the second suggestive effect is provided when the second role is won. can produce a special feeling, and can suggest that the third state is an advantageous state if the second combination is won. Also, for the player who knows that the third state is an advantageous state if he/she wins the second role, the second suggestive effect is executed when the player wins the second role. As a result, the player will not miss the fact that the player has won the second role, and the player will be thrilled.

In the preferred configuration 11, the game state transition means, when a third transition condition is satisfied in the second state of the first period (for example, winning a watermelon or a chance eye, and in the accompanying lottery process Fig. 10(a)), when winning, is a means for shifting to a fourth state (for example, a state accompanied by an old man and a princess), and said fourth state when said first combination is won by said lottery means. is a state more advantageous than the second state when the lottery means wins the first role (for example, CZ winning probability is high, FIG. 10(b)), and the effect execution means If the first role is won in the fourth state of the first period, a third suggestion effect that suggests that the first role has been won (for example, the corresponding role winning notification effect, A preferred configuration 12 is to execute images d3 and d5) of FIG. 13(a).

According to the preferred configuration 12, for a player who does not know that winning the first combination in the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state, when winning the first combination By executing the third suggesting effect at the moment, a special feeling can be produced, and it is possible to suggest that the fourth state is an advantageous state if the first combination is won. In addition, for a player who knows that winning the first role in the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state, the player who wins the first role may By executing the suggestion production, it is possible not to miss the fact that the player has won the first role, and to make the player's heart beat faster.

The third condition may be the same as the second condition.

In preferred configuration 12, the first state is a state in which neither the first character image (for example, princess image) nor the second character image (for example, old man image) is displayed (for example, FIG. 9 ( a)), the second state is a state in which the first character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 9B), and the third state is a state in which the second character image is displayed. (for example, FIG. 9(c)), and the fourth state is a state in which both the first character image and the second character image are displayed (for example, FIG. 9 ( d)), which is the preferred configuration 13;

According to the preferred configuration 13, the player can clearly determine each state in the first period from the character image.

In the preferred configuration 12 or 13, the game state transition means, when the first fall condition is satisfied in the fourth state of the first period (for example, after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed, the accompanying end lottery is a means for shifting to the second state, and the game state transition means is a means for shifting to the second state when a second falling condition is satisfied in the fourth state during the first period (for example, a guarantee When winning the lottery for ending the princess accompaniment after the number of games has elapsed), the means for shifting to the third state, and the game state shifting means, in the second state during the first period means for shifting to the first state when a fall condition is satisfied, and the game state transition means, when the first fall condition is satisfied in the third state of the first period, the A preferred configuration 14 is means for transitioning to the first state.

According to the preferred configuration 14, there may be transitions from favorable conditions to unfavorable conditions, thereby providing the player with a more exciting, tense and interesting game.

In preferred configurations 11, 12, 13, or 14, there may be a second time period (e.g., CZ) different from the first time period, during which the second state may occur. , and the third state may occur during the second period. According to the preferred configuration 15, the transition to the second state or the third state is made even in the second period different from the first period, so that the diversity of the game is provided to the player and the interest is improved. be able to.

In addition, a third role (for example, push-order bell) different from both the first role and the second role is provided, and the third role is won by the lottery means during the second period. In the second state or the third state of the case, the first privilege is granted (for example, the probability of winning AT shift is increased), and in the first period, the first prize is awarded by the lottery means. A second privilege may be given to the second state when winning the role or the third state when winning the second role by the lottery means (for example, CZ higher odds of winning a transfer).

According to this configuration, even if the state is the same, the conditions for granting the privilege are different and the privilege is also different when the period is different, so it is possible to provide a variety of performances and games.

<Other game machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals (hereinafter referred to as game (also called value), the input of gaming value is performed by a predetermined external device (a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method, a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method, etc.) input of electronic data from the electronic storage device), and the payout of gaming value includes outputting the electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device) It is a thing.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

<Explanation display according to the production situation>
Next, explanation display corresponding to the production situation will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Example 1)>
FIGS. 21(a) to 21(h) are diagrams showing screen transitions in the explanation display (embodiment 1) in accordance with the production situation in chronological order.

<Description display according to the production situation (Example 1) / Transition to CZ state>
The state shown in FIG. 21(a) is a state in which the rendering state in the advantageous section has shifted to the CZ state.

In the same state, since the effect state in the advantageous section has shifted to the CZ state, in the display area of the effect image display device 157, the state transition notification effect MP (in this example, Display of a character string "CZ rush"), and with the transition to the CZ state as a trigger, an explanation display possible notification TC (in this example, "game explanation") that informs that the game explanation display can be displayed (display of a character string, display of an image imitating the appearance of the effect button 192, and display of the character string "PUSH").

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Example 1)/Start of Display of Explanation Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(b) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a first period of a certain effect state (for example, CZ state) (for example, a period during which the explanation display possible notification TC is being executed), a certain operation (for example, effect Depressing operation of the button 192) is performed, an explanatory display regarding a certain effect state is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 21(b), the effect button 192 is pressed during the period (first period, 10 seconds in this example) during which the explanation display possible notification TC is being executed in the CZ state (certain effect state). Since an operation (a certain operation by the operation means) has been performed, an explanation display CP1 (explanation display concerning a certain effect state) regarding the CZ state is displayed.

In recent years, amusement machines have executed a wide variety of effects, and the effects have become complicated. It can be understood, and the player's degree of interest in the game and the performance effect can be enhanced. Also, when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display corresponding to the effect state is displayed, thereby providing an explanation display matching the timing when the player performs a certain operation by the operation means. It is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

It should be noted that the "certain production state" according to the present invention is not limited to the "CZ state", and production states other than the CZ state (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.) ). Also, a certain effect state is not limited to one effect state, and may be a plurality of effect states that can be shifted to on the game machine, or may be all the effect states that can be shifted to on the game machine.

Further, the "first period" according to the present invention is not limited to the "period during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed" or the "predetermined time", ) to complete a plurality of predetermined games, or a period from transition to a certain rendering state (eg, CZ state) to the certain rendering state (eg, CZ state) ) may be completed, or it may be a period from transitioning to a certain rendering state (eg, CZ state) to transitioning to another rendering state (eg, AT state). However, it may be a period from transition to a certain rendering state (for example, CZ state) to display of the explanation display (until an operation is performed by the operation means).

In addition, the trigger for starting the explanation display regarding the CZ state is not limited to the "pressing operation of the effect button 192", for example, it may be started when an operation by other operation means is received, or a certain effect state It may be started (automatically) without depending on the operation by the operation means, triggered by the shift to the .

Here, the explanation display of the slot machine according to the present example includes explanation display concerning benefits, transition conditions, etc. in each production state, explanation display concerning the content of production in each production state, explanation display concerning the story of production in each production state, and so on. , an explanation display regarding characters appearing in the production in each production state, an explanation display concerning motifs, and the like.

Each explanatory display is composed of one or more pages, and in this example, the explanatory display regarding the normal state is composed of multiple (four) pages, and the explanatory display regarding the CZ state is composed of multiple (four) pages. ) pages. Needless to say, the explanation display is not limited to the display composed of a plurality of pages.

In the example shown in FIG. 21(b), since the effect button 192 is pressed in the CZ state, the explanation display for the CZ state is displayed among the explanation displays for the CZ state configured with a plurality of (four) pages. (Page 1) CP1 is displayed.

In this example, as an explanation display (page 1) CP1 regarding the CZ state, an explanation of the transition condition from the CZ state to the AT state (in this example, "The more points you accumulate, the more chance you have! If you accumulate up to 500 points, you will enter AT!" is displayed).

Note that the content of the explanation display regarding the CZ state is not limited to this example, and for example, explains that "the CZ state is a gaming state in which points are to be obtained in a predetermined period (in this example, 20 games)". It may be a display that explains that ``the CZ state includes a princess accompanying state and a grandpa accompanying state,'' or a display that ``CZ is at the end of a predetermined period. After that, an AT lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the normal AT state based on the total value of points acquired during the predetermined period" may be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the display area on the right side of the explanation display (page 1) CP1 regarding the CZ state, an explanation display ( 2 page) is displayed (in this example, a character string “CZ (2) Explanation” and a right-pointing arrow is displayed).

Then, in the state where the explanation display (page 1) CP1 regarding the CZ state is displayed, when the operation of pressing the right button is accepted, the explanation display (page 2) regarding the CZ state is displayed, and the explanation regarding this CZ state is displayed. When the right button is pressed while the display (page 2) is being displayed, an explanation display regarding the CZ state (page 3) is displayed, and an explanation display regarding this CZ state (page 3) is displayed. In the state where the right button is pressed, an explanatory display (page 4) regarding the CZ state is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the display area on the left side of the CZ state explanation display (page 1) CP1, when the left button (not shown) is pressed, the normal state explanation display ( 4 page) is displayed (in this example, a character string of "Normal (4) Explanation" and an arrow pointing to the left) is displayed.

Then, in the state where the explanation display (page 1) CP1 regarding the CZ state is displayed, when the operation of pressing the left button is accepted, the explanation display (page 4) regarding the normal state is displayed as shown in FIG. ) Display NP4.

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Example 1) / Pressing Left Button>
The state shown in FIG. 21(c) is a state in which an explanatory display (page 4) NP4 relating to the normal state is displayed.

In the same state, in the state where the explanatory display (page 1) CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. As shown, an explanation display (page 4) NP4 regarding the normal state is displayed.

In this example, as an explanation display (page 4) NP4 regarding the normal state, an explanation about the relationship between the character accompanying state in the normal state and the winning probability of the rare role (in this example, "Grandpa & Princess accompanying state , The probability of winning is greatly increased for all rare roles.”).

According to this example, when the effect state is set to the first effect state (in this example, the CZ state), the first explanation display (in this example, explanation display regarding the CZ state) is displayed. Even if there is, when the operation means (in this example, the left button) is operated, the second explanation display (in this example, explanation display regarding the normal state) can be displayed. , it is possible to confirm the explanation display related to the effect state set before, to be able to prepare and review the content of the effect state, and to provide the explanation display required by the player, Player satisfaction and convenience can be enhanced.

The content of the explanation display (second explanation display) regarding the normal state is not limited to this example, for example, "In the normal state, perform a CZ shift lottery to determine whether to shift to the CZ state" or a display explaining that ``the normal state includes a non-accompanied state, a princess accompanying state, an old man accompanying state, and an old man & princess accompanying state. good too.

Note that the description display that can be displayed by pressing the left button (pressing the right button) is not limited to the description display regarding the normal state, and other description displays (for example, description display regarding the AT state, description display regarding the story, etc.). can also be displayed.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Embodiment 1)/End of Display of Explanation Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(d) is a state in which the explanatory display (page 4) NP4 relating to the normal state is erased (finished).

In this state, a predetermined condition is established in the state where the explanatory display (page 4) NP4 regarding the normal state shown in FIG. Therefore, the explanation display (page 4) NP4 regarding the normal state is erased (finished), and only the state transition notification effect MP (display of the character string "CZ rush") is performed.

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Example 1)/Start of Display of Menu Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(e) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed and the menu display MN is displayed.

In the slot machine according to the present example, even if a certain operation (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 192) is performed by the operating means during the second period of a certain effect state (for example, the CZ state), the certain effect A menu display is displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means during a second period of a certain rendering state without displaying an explanatory display regarding the state (for example, an explanatory display regarding the CZ state). .

In the state shown in FIG. 21(e), during the period (second period) after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC in the CZ state (certain effect state) is completed, the effect button 192 is pressed (by the operation means Since a certain operation) has been performed, the explanation display regarding the CZ state (explanation display regarding a certain effect state) is not displayed, and the menu display MN is displayed.

After browsing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again when a certain operation is performed by mistake, the player may feel annoyed. By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if an operation is performed, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, during a second period (in this example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. is performed, a menu display (menu display MN in this example) is displayed. By displaying the menu display when a certain operation is performed in , the player's convenience can be enhanced.

It should be noted that even if the explanation display regarding a certain production state (for example, the explanation display concerning the CZ state) is erased (finished), the first period of the certain production state (for example, the explanation display possible notification TC is executed during the period (10 seconds)), if a certain operation (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 192) is performed again by the operation means, the explanation display regarding the certain effect state is displayed again. It may be configured as

As shown in FIG. 21(e), in this example, as the menu display MN, a volume/light amount setting button for shifting to a volume/light amount setting screen on which setting (adjustment) of the volume and light amount of the effect means is possible, A custom setting button for shifting to a custom setting screen where the player can customize the game content, a game explanation button for shifting to the explanation display screen, and an end button for ending the menu display are displayed. .

Then, after selecting any button of the menu display MN using the up and down buttons (not shown), by pressing the effect button 192, in this example, the volume / light amount setting screen, the custom setting screen, the explanation display or exit the menu display MN.

According to this example, the menu display items include an item for displaying explanation display (game explanation button in this example) and an item for setting the game (in this example, volume/light amount setting button, custom setting button ) is included, even during a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, it is possible to display the explanation display by going through the menu display, and the game The convenience of users can be improved.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Example 1)/Start of Display of Explanation Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(f) is the state where the game explanation button is selected in the menu display MN, and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 21(g) is the state where the game explanation button is selected in the menu display MN. , the effect button 192 is pressed and the explanation is displayed.

In this example, in the state where the game explanation button is selected in the menu display MN, since the effect button 192 is pressed, the explanation display screen is displayed, and the current effect state ( In this example, an explanation display (in this example, an explanation display SP regarding the story of the production executed by the game machine) that does not depend on the CZ state is displayed.

Note that the explanation display that does not depend on the current production state is not limited to "explanation display regarding the story of the production executed by the game machine", for example, explanation display concerning characters appearing in various productions, explanation display concerning motifs, , an explanation display regarding the operation of the game machine (for example, a tutorial display), an explanation display concerning the business hours and events of the game parlor, an explanation display concerning the new machine, etc.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21(g), in the display area on the right side of the explanation display SP regarding the story, the explanation display (page 1) regarding the normal state is displayed when the operation of pressing the right button (not shown) is accepted. (In this example, display of a character string "Normal (1) explanation" and display of an arrow pointing to the right) is performed.

Then, in the state where the description display SP regarding the story is displayed, when the operation of pressing the right button is accepted, the description display regarding the normal state (page 1) is displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area on the left side of the explanation display SP regarding the story, a guide display (in this example, "ED Description" and an arrow pointing to the left).

Then, in the state where the explanation display SP regarding the story is being displayed, when the operation of pressing the left button is accepted, the explanation display regarding the ED is displayed.

According to this example, even when an explanation display that does not depend on the current production state (in this example, an explanation display SP regarding the story of the production executed by the game machine) is displayed, if the operation means is operated, a certain Since it is possible to display an explanation display (in this example, an explanation display regarding the normal state can be displayed by pressing the right button, and an explanation display regarding the ED state can be displayed by pressing the left button). Also, it is possible to check the explanation display regarding the effect state set before, and it is possible to prepare and review the contents of the effect state, and in addition, it is possible to provide the explanation display required by the player. , the player's satisfaction and convenience can be enhanced.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Embodiment 1)/End of Display of Explanation Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(h) is a state in which the performance button 192 is pressed and the top screen of the menu display MN is restored.

In this example, since the effect button 192 is pressed while the explanation display SP related to the story shown in FIG. A setting button, a custom setting button, a game description button, and an end button are displayed.

By pressing the effect button 192 after selecting the end button using the up and down buttons (not shown), the menu display MN can be terminated and the game screen can be restored.

In the example shown in FIGS. 21(a) to 21(d), the effect button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC, and the explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state and the explanation display NP4 regarding the normal state are displayed. After displaying, when the effect button 192 is pressed while the explanation display NP4 is being displayed, the display of the explanation display NP4 is erased (finished) and the game screen is returned to. .

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 21(e) to 21(h), in the state where the game explanation button is selected in the menu display MN, the effect button 192 is pressed and an explanation about the story is displayed. After the SP is displayed, the effect button 192 is pressed while the explanation display SP is being displayed, the top screen of the menu display MN is restored, and the end button is selected using the up and down buttons. An example has been described in which pressing the button 192 terminates the menu display MN and returns to the game screen.

That is, the procedure for returning to the game screen after displaying the explanation display (method of erasing (terminating) the explanation display) is the case where the explanation display is displayed via the menu display MN, and the case where the explanation display is displayed without going through the menu display MN. It is different when displaying the explanation display.

With such a configuration, it is possible to operate the operation means after clearly recognizing whether or not the menu display is passed when the explanation display is displayed, thereby preventing the player from being confused during the operation. This can be prevented, and convenience for the player can be enhanced.

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Example 2)>
FIGS. 21(i) to 21(l) are diagrams showing screen transitions in the explanation display (embodiment 2) in accordance with the production situation in chronological order.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Embodiment 2)/Execution of Notification of Possible Explanation Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(i) is a state in which a MAXBET operation has been performed in the CZ state (accompanied by the princess) and the explanation display possible notification TC is being executed.

In the same state, in the display area of the effect image display device 157, a display notifying that the effect state is the CZ state (princess accompaniment state) (in this example, a character string "CZ ~ princess accompany ~" is displayed, A character image including a princess) is displayed, and at the same time as the MAXBET operation is triggered, an explanation display possible notification TC (in this example, a character string “game explanation” is displayed and an image simulating the appearance of the effect button 192 is displayed). and display of the character string "PUSH").

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Embodiment 2)/End of Notification of Possible Explanation Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(j) is a state in which the explanation display possible notification TC has ended in the game in which the explanation display possible notification TC has been executed.

In this state, when the start lever 135 is pushed down, the operation navigation display is started, and the explanation display possible notification TC is erased (finished).

The slot machine according to the present example is configured to display an explanation display regarding a certain effect state when a certain operation is performed by the operating means during the first period of the certain effect state. In the example shown in FIGS. 21(i) to 21(j), the period (first period) during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed in the CZ state (certain effect state). In this example, the MAXBET operation is performed. Since the pressing operation of the production button 192 (a certain operation by the operation means) is not performed during the period from the start lever 135 to the pressing operation of the start lever 135, the explanation display regarding the CZ state (a certain production state ) is not displayed.

In addition, the "first period" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, one of the BET operation, the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. It may be a period from when another operation is performed after that, or one of the BET operation, start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation. It may be a period from when the operation is performed until a certain period of time elapses after that, or after a certain operation of the operation means is performed after a transition of the performance state, a change in the performance mode, or the like. It may be a period until a certain period of time elapses after a transition of the effect state or a change in the effect mode, or the like.

<Explanatory Display Matching Production Situation (Embodiment 2)/Third Stop Operation>
The state shown in FIG. 21(k) is a state in which the third stop operation has been executed in the game in which the explanation display possible notification TC has been executed.

In this state, the number of points (55 points in this example) acquired in the game is displayed.

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Example 2)/Start of Display of Menu Display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(l) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed in a state in which the explanation display is not displayed, and the menu display MN is displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a second period of a certain production state (for example, CZ state) (for example, a period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC is finished), a certain operation (for example, Even if the operation of pressing the effect button 192) is performed, the explanation display regarding the certain effect state (for example, the explanation display regarding the CZ state) is not displayed, and during the second period of the certain effect state, a certain When an operation is performed, the menu display MN is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 21 (l), during the period (second period) after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC in the CZ state (certain effect state) is finished, the effect button 192 is pressed (by the operation means Since a certain operation) has been performed, the explanation display regarding the CZ state (explanation display regarding a certain effect state) is not displayed, and the menu display MN is displayed.

After browsing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again when a certain operation is performed by mistake, the player may feel annoyed. By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if an operation is performed, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, during a second period (in this example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. is performed, a menu display (menu display MN in this example) is displayed. By displaying the menu display when a certain operation is performed in , the player's convenience can be enhanced.

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Example 3)>
FIGS. 22(a) to 22(l) are diagrams showing screen transitions in the explanation display (embodiment 3) in accordance with the production situation in chronological order.

<Explanation display according to the production situation (Example 3) / End of CZ state>
The state shown in FIG. 22(a) is a state in which the CZ state is terminated and the normal state is set as the rendering state.

In this state, since the CZ state has ended, a state transition notification effect (in this example, a character string "CZ end" is displayed) to notify that the CZ state has ended.

<Description display according to the production situation (Example 3) / Transition to normal state (non-accompanying state)>
The state shown in FIG. 22(b) is a state in which the production state in the advantageous section has shifted to the normal state (non-accompanying state).

In the same state, the state transition notification effect (in this example, " In addition to displaying the character string "●● stage"), the transition to the normal state (non-accompanying state) is triggered by the notification TC that can be explained (in this example, the character string "game explanation" is displayed and the production An image imitating the appearance of the button 192 and a character string "PUSH" are displayed.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Example 3)/Start of Display of Explanation Display>
In the state shown in FIG. 22(c), the effect button 192 is pressed during the execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. is in a state of

In the slot machine according to the present example, in a certain effect state (for example, normal game (non-accompaniment state)) during the first period (for example, the period during which the explanation display possible notification TC is being executed), a certain When an operation (for example, an operation to press the effect button 192) is performed, an explanatory display regarding a certain effect state (for example, an explanatory display regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state)) is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 22(c), during the period (first period. In this example, 10 seconds) during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed in the normal state (non-accompanying state) (certain effect state), Since the performance button 192 has been pressed (a certain operation by the operating means), an explanation display NP1 (explanation display concerning a certain production state) regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) is displayed.

In recent years, amusement machines have executed a wide variety of effects, and the effects have become complicated. It can be understood, and the player's degree of interest in the game and the performance effect can be enhanced. Also, when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display corresponding to the effect state is displayed, thereby providing an explanation display matching the timing when the player performs a certain operation by the operation means. It is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

Further, according to the first and third embodiments, when the effect state is set to the first effect state (for example, the CZ state), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the operating means is operated ), a first explanation display (for example, an explanation display for the CZ state) is displayed as an explanation display, and the production state is set to the second production state (for example, normal state). In the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation means is operated), the second explanation display regarding the second effect state (for example, explanation display regarding the normal state) is displayed as the explanation display. In recent years, amusement machines have executed a wide variety of effects in order to display the effects, and the effects have become more complicated. It is possible to increase the player's degree of interest in the game and the performance effect. Further, by displaying the explanation display corresponding to the effect state, the explanation display can be provided to the player at an appropriate timing, and the player's convenience can be improved.

The explanation display regarding the normal state of this example is composed of a plurality of (four) pages, and in the example shown in FIG. Therefore, of the explanation displays for the normal state composed of a plurality of (four) pages, the explanation display (one page) NP1 for the normal state (non-accompanying state) is displayed.

In this example, an explanation display (1 page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state) is used to explain the conditions for transitioning to the state of accompanying the grandpa or the accompanying state of the princess in the normal state (in this example, "Suica, accompany the grandpa at the chance Chance Display of the character string "chance to accompany the princess with weak cherry, strong cherry").

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(c), in the display area on the right side of the explanation display (page 1) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state), when an operation of pressing the right button (not shown) is received, the normal Display a guidance display (in this example, display a character string "Normal (2) Explanation" and a right-pointing arrow) indicating that an explanation display (page 2) regarding the state (accompanying state) will be displayed. .

Then, in the state where the explanation display (page 1) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) is displayed, if the operation of pressing the right button is accepted, the explanation display (page 2) regarding the normal state (accompaniment state) is displayed. ) is displayed, and in the state where the explanation display (page 2) regarding the normal state (grandfather accompanies state) is displayed, if the right button is pressed, the explanation display regarding the normal state (princess accompaniment state) is displayed. (page 3) is displayed, and an explanation display (page 3) regarding this normal state (princess accompanying state) is displayed. status) is displayed (page 4).

On the other hand, in the display area on the left side of the explanation display (page 1) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state), when the left button (not shown) is pressed, the explanation display regarding ST (stock time) is displayed. Guidance display (in this example, display of a character string "ST description" and display of a leftward arrow) is performed.

Then, in the state where the explanatory display (page 1) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state) is displayed, when the operation of pressing the left button is accepted, the explanatory display regarding ST is displayed.

According to this example, when the production state is set to the first production state (in this example, the normal state (non-accompanying state)), the first explanation display (in this example, the normal state (non-accompanying state) state) is displayed, the second explanatory display (in this example, an explanatory display regarding ST) can be displayed by operating the operating means (in this example, the left button). For example, it is possible to check the presentation state to be shifted to the next and the explanation display regarding the previously set presentation state, and in addition to being able to prepare and review the content of the presentation state, the player can An explanatory display can be provided, and the player's satisfaction and convenience can be enhanced.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Embodiment 3)/End of Display of Explanation Display>
The state shown in FIG. 22(d) is a state in which the explanatory display (one page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) has been erased (finished).

In this state, a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the explanatory display (page 1) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state) shown in FIG. was performed), the display of the explanation display NP1 relating to the normal state (non-accompanied state) is erased (finished).

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Example 3)/Start of Display of Menu Display>
The state shown in FIG. 22(e) is a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed and the menu display MN is displayed while the explanation display shown in FIG. 22(d) is erased (finished).

In the slot machine according to this example, during a second period (for example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC is finished) in a certain effect state (for example, normal state (non-accompanying state)), Even if an operation (for example, pressing the production button 192) is performed, the explanation display regarding the certain production state (for example, the explanation display concerning the normal state (non-accompanying state)) is not displayed, and the It is configured to display a menu display (for example, menu display MN) when a certain operation is performed by the operation means during the second period.

In the state shown in FIG. 22(e), the effect button 192 is pressed during the period (second period) after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC in the normal state (non-accompanying state) (certain effect state) is finished. Since an operation (a certain operation by the operation means) has been performed, the menu display MN is displayed without displaying the explanation display (explanation display concerning a certain effect state) regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state).

After browsing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again when a certain operation is performed by mistake, the player may feel annoyed. By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if an operation is performed, convenience for the player can be improved.

Also, a second period of a certain effect state (in this example, normal state (non-accompanying state)) (in this example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 22(b) is finished) When a certain operation is performed by the operation means, a menu display (menu display MN in this example) is displayed. Therefore, a period (second period) is provided in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed. On the other hand, by displaying the menu display when a certain operation is performed during the period, the player's convenience can be enhanced.

<Description Display Matching Production Situation (Embodiment 3)/End of Menu Display>
The state shown in FIG. 22(f) is a state in which the end button is selected on the menu display MN, and FIG. 22(g) is a state in which the menu display MN is erased (finished).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 22(f), in the state where the top screen of the menu display MN is displayed, the effect button 192 is pressed after the end button is selected using the up and down buttons (not shown). Since the operation has been performed, the menu display MN is erased (finished) and the game screen is restored.

<Explanatory Display Matching Production Situation (Example 3)/Demonstration Production>
The state shown in FIG. 22(h) is the state in which the demonstration effect has been started, and the state shown in FIG. 22(i) is the state in which the demonstration effect has ended.

In this example, since the condition for starting the demonstration effect is satisfied on the normal screen (for example, no BET operation is performed for a predetermined time), the condition for ending the demonstration effect is satisfied after starting the demonstration effect (for example, Since the BET operation has been performed), the demonstration effect is terminated and the game screen is returned to, and the return of the game screen (end of the demo effect) is used as a trigger to notify that the game explanation display can be displayed. Displayable notification TC is performed.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Example 3)/Start of Display of Explanation Display>
In the state shown in FIG. 22(j), the effect button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. is in a state of

In the slot machine according to this example, during a second period (for example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC is finished) in a certain effect state (for example, normal state (non-accompanying state)), Even when an operation (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 192) is performed, if a demonstration effect is being executed before a certain operation by the operation means, the menu display is not displayed. , an explanatory display regarding the certain rendering state (for example, an explanatory display regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state)).

In the state shown in FIG. 22(j), the effect button 192 is pressed during the period (second period) after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC in the normal state (non-accompanying state) (certain effect state) ends. An operation (a certain operation by the operation means) is performed, but since the demonstration effect is being executed before the certain operation by the operation means, the normal state (non-accompanying state) is displayed without displaying the menu display. Explanation display NP1 (explanation display concerning a certain effect state) is displayed.

According to this example, by executing the demonstration effect, the state in which the game explanation display can be displayed is restored without going through the menu display, so that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

<Description display according to the production situation (Example 3) / Transition to normal state (Princess accompaniment state)>
The state shown in FIG. 22(k) is a state in which the production state in the advantageous section has shifted to the normal state (princess accompanying state).

In the same state, the state transition notification effect (in this example, " ●● Display of the character string “Stage ~ Accompanied Princess ~”), and with the transition to the normal state (accompanied by the princess), an explanation display possible notification TC is displayed to notify that the game explanation display can be displayed. Is going.

<Explanation Display Matching Production Situation (Example 3)/Start of Display of Explanation Display>
In the state shown in FIG. 22(l), the effect button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. is in a state of

In the slot machine according to this example, during a first period (for example, the period during which the explanation display possible notification TC is being executed) in a certain effect state (for example, normal state (princess accompanying state)), a certain When an operation (for example, an operation to press the production button 192) is performed, an explanation display regarding a certain production state (for example, an explanation display concerning the normal state (princess accompaniment state)) is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 22(l), during the period (first period. In this example, 10 seconds) during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed in the normal state (princess accompaniment state) (certain effect state), Since the performance button 192 has been pressed (a certain operation by the operation means), an explanation display NP3 (explanation display concerning a certain production state) regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state) is displayed.

In recent years, amusement machines have executed a wide variety of effects, and the effects have become complicated. It can be understood, and the player's degree of interest in the game and the performance effect can be enhanced. Also, when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display corresponding to the effect state is displayed, thereby providing an explanation display matching the timing when the player performs a certain operation by the operation means. It is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

The explanation display regarding the normal state of this example is composed of a plurality of (four) pages, and in the example shown in FIG. Therefore, of the explanation displays for the normal state composed of a plurality of (four) pages, the explanation display (three pages) NP3 for the normal state (princess accompaniment state) is displayed.

In this example, an explanation display (page 3) regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state) is used as NP3, an explanation of the princess accompanying state in the normal state (in this example, "Princess accompanying state In the princess accompanying state, weak cherries and strong cherries are won. The probability is greatly increased." is displayed).

Also, as shown in FIG. 22(l), in the display area on the right side of the explanation display (page 3) NP3 regarding the normal state (princess accompaniment state), when an operation of pressing the right button (not shown) is accepted, normal Guidance display suggesting that an explanation display (page 4) regarding the state (grandpa & princess accompanying state) will be displayed (in this example, display of a character string "normal (4) explanation" and display of an arrow pointing to the right) I do.

Then, in the state where the explanation display (page 3) NP3 regarding the normal state (princess accompaniment state) is displayed, if the operation of pressing the right button is accepted, the explanation display ( 4 page).

On the other hand, in the display area on the left side of the explanation display (page 3) NP3 regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state), an explanation display regarding the normal state (grandfather accompanying state) is displayed when the operation of pressing the left button (not shown) is accepted. (In this example, display of a character string "Normal (2) explanation" and display of an arrow pointing to the left) is performed.

Then, in the state where the explanation display (page 3) NP3 regarding the normal state (princess accompaniment state) is displayed, if the operation of pressing the left button is accepted, the explanation display regarding the normal state (grandfather accompaniment state) is displayed. .

According to this example, even in the same effect state (in this example, the same stage in the normal state), the explanation display differs depending on the operation timing of the operation means, so that the player performs a certain operation with the operation means. It is possible to provide an explanation display that matches the timing at the timing, and it is possible to enhance convenience for the player.

Further, according to this example, when the effect state is set to the first effect state (for example, the normal state (non-accompanying state)), when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the operation means is operated ), a first explanation display (for example, an explanation display for a normal state (non-accompanied state)) is displayed as an explanation display, and the production state is the second production state (for example, normal state (princess accompaniment state) normal state), when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation means is operated), a second display related to the second effect state is displayed as the explanation display. In order to display an explanation display (for example, an explanation display about the normal state (princess accompaniment state) normal state), recent game machines have executed a wide variety of effects, and the effects have become complicated. By displaying the display, the player can better understand the content of each effect state, and the player's degree of interest in the game and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by displaying the explanation display corresponding to the effect state, the explanation display can be provided to the player at an appropriate timing, and the player's convenience can be improved.

<Description display / summary according to the production situation>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment includes setting means (for example, game state control processing) capable of setting one of a plurality of production states. ) and operation means (for example, production button 192), wherein the plurality of production states include a certain production state (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.), and the first period of the certain production state (for example, the period during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed, the predetermined plurality of A period until the game is completed, a period from transitioning to a certain effect state until the end of the certain effect state, a period from transitioning to a certain effect state to another effect state, or The period from the transition to the effect state to the display of the explanation display (until the operation is performed by the operation means), the BET operation, the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. During the period from when one of the operations is performed until when the other operation is performed after that, one of the BET operation, the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. is performed until a certain period of time elapses after that, after there is a transition in the performance state or a change in the performance mode, etc., until a certain operation of the operation means is performed after that, the performance state When a certain operation is performed by the operation means during the period from the transition to the production mode, the change in the production mode, etc. until a certain period of time has passed after that), an explanation display regarding the certain production state (for example, the Explanation display CP1 for the CZ state shown in 21(b), explanation display NP1 for the normal state (not accompanying state) shown in FIG. 22(c), explanation display NP3 for the normal state (princess accompanying state) shown in FIG. 22(l) ) is displayed.

In recent years, amusement machines have executed a wide variety of effects, and the effects have become complicated. The content of the state can be better understood, and the player's degree of interest in the game and performance effects can be enhanced. Also, when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display corresponding to the effect state is displayed, thereby providing an explanation display matching the timing when the player performs a certain operation by the operation means. It is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

In addition, even if the certain operation is performed by the operation means during the second period of the certain effect state (for example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC is finished), It may be one that does not display the explanation display.

After viewing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again when a certain operation is performed by mistake, the player may feel annoyed. By providing a period (second period) during which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, convenience for the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the certain operation is performed by the operating means during the second period of the certain effect state, a menu display (for example, the menu display MN shown in FIG. 21(e)) is displayed. good too.

With such a configuration, while providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, the menu display is displayed when a certain operation is performed during the period. As a result, convenience for the player can be enhanced.

Further, the items of the menu display may include an item for displaying the explanation display and an item for displaying the setting display regarding the game.

With such a configuration, even during a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, it is possible to display the explanation display via the menu display. , the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

Also, the second period may be a period later than the first period of the certain effect state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes setting means (for example, game state control processing) capable of setting one of a plurality of production states. In the game machine, the plurality of production states (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, special zone, etc.) include a first production state (for example, CZ state) and a second (for example, normal state), an explanation display can be displayed in the first rendering state and the second rendering state, and the rendering state is set to the first rendering state In this case, when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when the operation means is operated and the state shifts to a new effect state set by the setting means), the explanation display is the first display related to the first effect state. When the explanation display (for example, the explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b)) is displayed and the production state is set to the second production state, when the predetermined condition is established, the explanation The gaming machine is characterized in that it displays a second explanation display (for example, explanation display NP1 for the normal state (non-accompanying state) shown in FIG. 22(c)) regarding the second effect state as a display.

In recent years, amusement machines have executed a wide variety of effects, and the effects have become complicated. The content of the state can be better understood, and the player's degree of interest in the game and performance effects can be enhanced. Further, by displaying the explanation display corresponding to the effect state, the explanation display can be provided to the player at an appropriate timing, and the player's convenience can be improved.

Further, an operation means (for example, a production button 192) is provided, and when the production state is set to the first production state, even when the first explanation display is displayed, the operation means can be operated. When operated, the second explanatory display may be displayed.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to check the explanation display regarding the next transition state and the previously set effect state, and it is possible to prepare and review the contents of the effect state. In addition, it is possible to provide the explanation display required by the player, thereby enhancing the player's satisfaction and convenience.

Further, an operation means (for example, a production button 192) may be provided, and the predetermined condition may be that the operation means is operated. Further, the predetermined condition may be transition to the new effect state set by the setting means.

<Display mode of remaining G number>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the display mode of the AT remaining G number (remaining game number) in the AT state will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of changes in display modes such as AT remaining G number display, number of earned medals display, and the like.

<Display Mode of Remaining Gs/AT State (Remaining Gs 38)>
The state shown in FIG. 23(a) is a state in which a start operation (pressing operation of the start lever 135) is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining number of Gs is 38), and an internal winning is made at the push order bell.

In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, in a certain game state (for example, AT state), the number of games displayed (for example, AT remaining G number display) indicating the number of games played in the certain game state, and the number of acquired game values are displayed. (for example, the number of medals won) can be displayed, and the number of given games (for example, the number of Gs added to AT) can be displayed to indicate the number of games newly given in the certain game state. is configured to

In the state shown in FIG. 23(a), since the number of AT remaining Gs in the AT state is 38 games, the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157 shows the number of games in the AT state (certain game state). As the AT remaining G number display RG (playing number display), a character string "remaining 38G" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example).

In addition, in the same state, since the number of medals obtained in the AT state is 6, in the upper right display area of the effect image display device 157, the obtained medal number display MC ( Acquisition number display), the character string "6 cards" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example).

The state shown in FIG. 23(b) is a state in which the third stop operation is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining G number 38), and the pressing order bell wins.

In this state, since the AT remaining G number in the AT state does not change in 38 games, the AT remaining G number indicating the number of games in the AT state (certain game state) is displayed in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157. As RG (number of times played), a character string of "remaining 38G" is displayed in normal color (black in this example).

On the other hand, in the same state, 13 medals were obtained by winning the pushing order bell, and the number of medals obtained in the AT state was 19 (= 6 + 13). In the display area of , a character string of "19" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example) as an acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display) indicating the number of acquired medals (game value).

<Remaining G number display mode/AT state (Remaining G number 37)/Additional 10 G>
The state shown in FIG. 23(c-1) is a state in which a start operation (pressing operation of the start lever 135) is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining G number 37), winning the extra lottery, and 10G is awarded. is.

In this state, since the AT remaining G number in the AT state is 37 games, the AT remaining G number display RG indicating the number of games in the AT state (certain game state) is displayed in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157. As (number of games displayed), a character string "remaining 37 G" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example).

In the same state, since the number of medals obtained in the AT state is 17, in the upper right display area of the effect image display device 157, the obtained medal number display MC ( Acquisition number display), the character string "17 cards" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example).

In addition, in the same state, since the addition lottery in the AT state is won and 10 games are newly given, an addition effect is executed to notify the AT added G number display AG indicating the AT added G number, and the added effect is executed. A character string "+10G" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example) as the AT-added G number display AG.

The state shown in FIG. 23(d-1) is a state in which the third stop operation is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining G number 37), and a certain winning combination with a payout number of 2 is won.

In the same state, 10 games are newly awarded by winning the extra lottery, and the remaining AT G number in the AT state is 47G (=37G + 10G). As the AT remaining G number display RG (game number display) indicating the number of games played in (a certain game state), a character string "remaining 47G" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example).

Also, in the same state, two medals were obtained by winning a certain winning combination, and the number of medals obtained in the AT state was 19 (=17 + 2). In the upper right display area, a character string "19" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example) as a display of the number of won medals MC (display of the number of won medals) that indicates the number of medals (game value) won. .

<Remaining G number display mode/AT state (Remaining G number 37)/Additional 300 G>
The state shown in FIG. 23(c-2) is a state in which a start operation (pressing operation of the start lever 135) is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining G number 37), winning the extra lottery, and 300G is awarded. , which is a modification of the state shown in FIG.

In this state, the AT remaining G number in the AT state is 37 games, and the number of medals acquired in the AT state is 17. Therefore, as in the state shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), the AT remaining G As the number display RG (game count display), the character string "Remaining 37G" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black), and as the acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display), in normal color (in this example, , black) displays the character string "17".

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 23(c-2), the additional lottery in the AT state is won, and 300 games are newly awarded unlike the state shown in FIG. 23(c-1).

In the slot machine according to this example, when a predetermined condition is established in a certain game state (for example, AT state) (for example, when the number of newly given extra G becomes 300G or more), a new A given number of games display (e.g., AT added G number display AG) showing the number of games given is configured to change from a fifth display mode (e.g., black) to a sixth display mode (e.g., rainbow color). are doing.

In the state shown in FIG. 23 (c-2), the addition lottery is won in the AT state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied (the newly given additional G number is 300G or more), so the AT additional G number By executing an additional effect that notifies the display AG, and displaying the character string "+300G" in a special color (rainbow color in this example) as the AT added G number display AG in the additional effect, the AT added G number The display AG is changed from black (fifth display mode) to rainbow color (sixth display mode).

According to this example, when a predetermined condition is established in a certain game state, the display mode of the given game count display indicating the number of games newly given in the certain game state is changed, so that the display becomes monotonous. The display of the number of times of games, which tends to be difficult, can be changed, the games can be livened up, and the interest of the players can be heightened.

In addition, the "predetermined condition" is not limited to the condition that is satisfied when the newly granted additional G number is 300G or more, and the newly granted additional G number is a value other than 300G or more. It may be a condition that is established when the number of added Gs becomes a certain value (for example, 500 G). (For example, 300 G or more and 500 or less). It can be a condition.

In addition, the change in the display mode of the given game count display (AT added G number display) is not limited to this example. One, more or all of the fonts may be changed.

In addition, when changing the color of the given game number display (AT added G number display), colors other than black and rainbow colors may be applied, or three or more colors may be applied. When the number of times (AT additional G number) exceeds the first value, the given game number display (AT additional G number display) is changed from black to red, and when it exceeds the second value, the given game number display The display mode of the given game count display (AT added G number display) may be changed a plurality of times, such as changing (AT added G number display) from red to rainbow.

The state shown in FIG. 23(d-2) is a state in which the third stop operation is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining G number 37), and a winning combination with two payouts is won. This is a modification of the state shown in (d-1).

In the same state, two medals were obtained by winning a prize combination, and the number of medals obtained in the AT state was 19 (=17 + 2). In the display area, a character string of "19" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example) as an acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display) indicating the number of acquired medals (game value).

In the slot machine according to this example, when the first condition is established in a certain game state (for example, AT state) (for example, when AT remaining G number becomes 300G or more), the number of games in a certain game state is indicated. The number display (for example, AT remaining G number display RG) is configured to change from a first display mode (eg, black) to a second display mode (eg, rainbow color).

In the state shown in FIG. 23(d-2), unlike the state shown in FIG. 37G+300G), and since the first condition is satisfied (AT remaining G number is 300G or more), in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157, the number of AT state (certain game state) games is counted. As the AT remaining G number display RG (game count display), by displaying the character string "remaining 337 G" in a special color (in this example, rainbow color), the AT remaining G number display RG is displayed in black (first display mode) to a rainbow color (second display mode).

According to this example, when the first condition is established in a certain game state, the display mode of the number-of-games display indicating the number of games in that certain game state is changed. can be changed, the game can be livened up, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the "first condition" according to the present invention is not limited to the condition that is established when the AT remaining G number is 300G or more, and the case where the AT remaining G number is a certain value other than 300G or more. It may be a condition that is established when the AT remaining G number reaches a specific value (eg, 500G), or a condition where the AT remaining G number is in a certain numerical range (eg, 300G or more and 500 or less). Alternatively, the condition may be established when the most advantageous G number (maximum additional G number) for the player is added to the remaining AT G number.

In addition, the change in the display mode of the game number display (AT remaining G number display RG) is not limited to this example, and for example, the game number display (AT remaining G number display RG) color, pattern, size, shape, One, more or all of the fonts may be changed.

In addition, when changing the color of the AT remaining G number display RG (game number display), colors other than black and rainbow colors may be applied, or three or more colors may be applied. When the number of Gs (the number of games played) exceeds a first value, the AT remaining G number display RG (the number of games played) is changed from black to red, and when the number exceeds the second value, the remaining AT G number is displayed. The display mode of the AT remaining G number display RG (game count display) may be changed multiple times, such as by changing the RG (game count display) from red to rainbow.

<Remaining G number display mode / AT state (remaining G number 300 → 299)>
The state shown in FIG. 23(e) is a state in which the AT state (remaining G number 300) game is finished, and the state shown in FIG. This is a state in which an operation (pressing operation of the start lever 135) has been performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 23(f), three medals are inserted, and the number of medals obtained in the AT state is 238 (=241 - 3). In the display area, a character string of "238" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example) as an acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display) indicating the number of acquired medals (game value).

In the slot machine according to this example, when the number of games is displayed in the second display mode (for example, rainbow color), if the second condition is met (for example, if the AT remaining G number is less than 300G, ), the display of the number of games changes (returns) to the first display mode (for example, black).

In the state shown in FIG. 23(f), the AT remaining G number has changed from 300G to 299G, and the second condition has been satisfied (AT remaining G number has fallen below 300G). In the display area, as an AT remaining G number display RG (game number display) indicating the number of games in the AT state (certain game state), a character string "remaining 299 G" is displayed in a normal color (black in this example). As a result, the AT remaining G number display RG is changed (returned) from rainbow color (second display mode) to black (first display mode).

If the display of the number of games is continued in the second display mode, the display becomes troublesome for the player, and there is a risk that the game may become unsatisfactory. When the second condition is satisfied, the display of the number of games changes to the first display mode. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the desire to play is reduced.

<Display Mode of Remaining Gs/AT State (Remaining Gs 179)>
The state shown in FIG. 23(g) is a state in which the third stop operation has been performed in the AT state (179 remaining Gs).

In the slot machine according to this example, when the third condition is established (for example, when the number of medals won reaches 1000 or more) in a certain gaming state (for example, AT state), the winning number display indicating the number of winning game values is displayed. (For example, the number of won medals display MC) is configured to change from a third display mode (eg, black) to a fourth display mode (eg, rainbow color).

In the state shown in FIG. 23(g), the number of medals acquired in the AT state in the game is 1000, and the third condition is satisfied (the number of acquired medals is 1000 or more). In the upper right display area of the display device 157, a character string "1000" is displayed in a special color (rainbow color in this example) as a display of the number of won medals MC (display of the number of won medals) indicating the number of medals (game value) won. is displayed, the number of won medals display MC is changed from black (third display mode) to rainbow color (fourth display mode).

According to this example, when the third condition is satisfied in a certain game state, the display mode of the acquired number display indicating the number of acquired game values is changed. It is possible to provide the game, liven up the game, and enhance the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the "third condition" according to the present invention is not limited to the condition that is established when the number of acquired medals is 1,000 or more, but when the number of acquired medals exceeds a certain number other than 1,000. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the number of acquired medals reaches a specific number (for example, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, etc.). It may be a condition that is satisfied when a certain numerical range (for example, 500 or more and 1000 or less) is reached, or a condition that is satisfied when the upper limit of the medals that can be obtained in a certain game state is reached. There may be.

Also, the change in the display mode of the display of the number of wins (display of the number of medals won) is not limited to this example. One, several, or all may vary.

In addition, when changing the color of the display of the number of acquisitions (display of the number of medals acquired), colors other than black and rainbow colors may be applied, or three or more colors may be applied. When the number of medals) exceeds a first value (e.g., 500), the display of the acquired number (display of the number of medals acquired) is changed from black to red, and the second value (e.g., 1000) is exceeded. In some cases, the display mode of the display of the number of acquisitions (display of the number of medals acquired) may be changed multiple times, such as by changing the display of the number of acquisitions (display of the number of medals acquired) from red to rainbow.

Further, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of won medals reaches 1000 or more) in a certain game state (for example, AT state), the number of acquired game values increases to a certain value. (e.g., 1000 sheets) is displayed in a fourth display mode (e.g., rainbow color) with a specified number breakthrough effect (e.g., display of a character string such as "1000 sheets exceeded" or "1000 sheets OVER") configured to run.

In the state shown in FIG. 23(g), the number of medals acquired in the AT state is 1000, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of acquired medals is 1000 or more), so the number of acquired game values increases. A character string "1000 sheets OVER" is displayed in a special color (rainbow color in this example) as a specified number breakthrough effect OP indicating that a certain value (1000 sheets in this example) has been reached.

According to the present example, it is possible to make the prescribed number breakthrough effect, which indicates that the number of acquired game values has reached a certain value, stand out, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. In particular, if the display mode of the specified number breakthrough effect is set to the same display mode (for example, rainbow color) as the acquired number display, which tends to be monotonous, both the acquired number display and the specified number breakthrough effect can be made conspicuous. , the player's desire to play can be further enhanced.

In addition, the specified number breakthrough effect is not limited to 1000, but is an effect performed in increments of 250, such as 250, 500, and 750. (black).

<Display Mode of Remaining Gs/AT State (Remaining Gs 200)>
The state shown in FIG. 23(h) is a state in which the start operation (pressing operation of the start lever 135) is performed in the AT state (remaining G number is 200).

In the slot machine according to the present example, the display of the number of wins (eg, number of won medals display MC) changes from the fourth display mode (eg, rainbow color) to the fourth display mode (eg, rainbow color) before a certain game state (eg, AT state) ends. It is configured so as not to change (return) to three display modes (for example, black).

In the state shown in FIG. 23(h), the number of medals obtained in the AT state is 997, which does not satisfy the third condition (the number of medals obtained is less than 1000). In the upper right display area, a character string "997 medals" is displayed in a special color (rainbow color in this example) as the display of the number of won medals MC (display of the number of won medals).

As long as a certain game state continues, the number of acquired game values basically increases. If the number of wins displayed in the fourth display mode is changed back to the third display mode when the number of wins has decreased to , the reduction in the number of wins will be emphasized, and there is a risk that the game will stagnate. According to this example, even if the third condition is no longer satisfied, the display of the acquired number in the fourth display mode is continued and the display mode is not returned to the third display mode. You can avoid situations like this.

Regarding the number of acquired medals display MC (number of acquired medals), even if the number of acquired medals is less than 1000, the special color (in this example, rainbow color) was set to continue. (eg, 900 sheets), the normal color (black in this example) may be restored. A preferable value for this certain value is a value that does not reach even if medals cannot be obtained for several games from a state in which the number of obtained medals is 1,000.

By doing so, even if the player continuously draws a losing role, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's desire to play is reduced, and at the same time, the number of acquired medals is significantly reduced for some reason. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the display of the number of acquired medals MC (display of the number of acquired medals) from becoming a troublesome display for the player, and to avoid a situation in which the player's desire to play is reduced.

<Display mode/Summary of remaining Gs>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment includes setting means (for example, game state control processing) capable of setting one of a plurality of game states. wherein the plurality of game states include a certain game state (for example, AT state), and in the certain game state, a number of games indicating the number of games in the certain game state A display (for example, AT remaining G number display RG shown in FIG. 23) can be displayed, and when the first condition is satisfied in the certain game state (for example, when AT remaining G number becomes 300G or more), the game The gaming machine is characterized in that the number display changes from a first display mode (for example, black) to a second display mode (for example, rainbow color).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the display of the number of games, which tends to be monotonous, to liven up the game and increase the interest of the players.

Further, when the game number display is displayed in the second display mode (for example, rainbow color), if the first condition is not satisfied (for example, the AT remaining G number is less than 300G), The display of the number of games may change to the first display mode (for example, black).

If the number-of-games display in the second display mode is continued, the display becomes troublesome for the player, and there is a risk that the game will stagnate. It is possible to prevent a troublesome display and avoid a situation in which the player's desire to play is reduced.

In addition, in the certain game state, it is possible to display an acquired number display (for example, an acquired medal number display MC shown in FIG. 23) indicating the number of acquired game values, and the second condition is satisfied in the certain game state. (for example, when the number of won medals reaches 1000 or more), the display of the number of wins changes from the third display mode (for example, black) to the fourth display mode (for example, rainbow color), and the display of the number of wins is changed. may not change from the fourth display mode to the third display mode when the second condition is no longer satisfied before the certain game state ends.

As long as a certain game state continues, the number of acquired game values basically increases. If the number of wins displayed in the fourth display mode is changed back to the third display mode when the number of wins has decreased to , the reduction in the number of wins will be emphasized, and there is a risk that the game will stagnate. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's desire to play is reduced.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment. For example, the "certain gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT state, Advantageous zone normal state, CZ, specialized zone, withdrawal chance zone, ending state, and the like may be used.

<Stock priority>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, stock priority will be described.

Here, before explaining the stock priority order, the game state will be explained. There are normal state (normal state), CZ state, normal AT state (AT state), specialized zone, withdrawal chance zone, and ending state (ED).

The specialized zone is a gaming state in which an extra game is likely to be awarded (or always awarded). A blue 7 specialized zone (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a specialized zone (blue 7)) is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the red 7 specialized zone (in this example, a gaming state in which additional games are likely to be awarded). There is.) exists.

The specialized zone may be any gaming state in which the player can obtain an advantageous right. , a game state in which it is easy for the player to transition to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus), or the like. In addition, the specialized zone is not limited to two types, for example, a specialized zone (red 7), a zone other than the specialized zone (blue 7) 7) There may be zones that are more advantageous to the player than 7) or zones that are more disadvantageous to the player than specialized zones (red 7) or specialized zones (blue 7).

In the AT state, a special zone lottery is executed for each game to determine whether or not to shift to the special zone. It is possible to obtain a right (the first right) that can be transferred to the zone (red 7).

The state of acquiring (stocking) the right (first right) that can be transferred to this specialized zone (red 7) is sometimes called "red 7 stock state", and the first acquired (stock) A right may be called "red 7 stock", and the number of first rights may be called "red 7 stock number".

Also, when winning the special zone (blue 7) in the special zone lottery in the AT state, the player has the right to move to the special zone (blue 7) (second right more advantageous than the first right). can be obtained.

The state of acquiring (stocking) rights (second rights) that can be transferred to this specialized zone (Blue 7) is sometimes called "Blue 7 stock state". The right is sometimes called "blue 7 stock" and the number of second rights is called "blue 7 stock number".

In addition, in the state of acquiring (stocking) the right (second right) that can be transferred to the special zone (blue 7) in the red 7 stock state, or in the special zone (red 7) in the blue 7 stock state A state in which a transferable right (first right) is acquired is sometimes referred to as a “red 7 blue 7 stock state”.

In this example, even if you win the special zone lottery in the AT game, the right (first right) that can be transferred to the special zone (red 7) without immediately transferring to the special zone (red 7 stock state), if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the remaining AT G number in the AT state becomes 0), the first right may be used, and the specialized zone When a right (second right) that can be transferred to (Blue 7) is acquired (Blue 7 stock state), when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0 ), using that second right.

<Stock Priority (Example 1)>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the order of stock priority (Example 1).

Example 1 is an example in which blue stock is digested preferentially over red 7 stock when blue 7 is stocked in red 7 stock.

<Priority of Stock (Example 1)/Red 7 Stock Status>
The state indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 24 is the state in which the M-th game (AT state) is started.

In the same state, since the special zone (red 7) was won in the special zone lottery in the game before the M game (AT state), and it is in the red 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 1), As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the lower right stock display area of the effect image display device 157, a red 7 stock display RS (in this example, a red 7 stock display RS indicating that the red 7 stock state is displayed) image) is displayed.

<Priority of Stock (Example 1)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock Status>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in FIG. 24 is the state in which the M+1th game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, the special zone (blue 7) is won in the special zone lottery in the M+1 game (AT state), and the red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 1, blue 7 stock number = 1). However, in this example, priority is given to the blue 7 stock display BS (in this example, the image of the decorative symbol “blue 7”) over the red 7 stock display RS (in this example, the image of the decorative symbol “red 7”). It is configured to be displayed as

Therefore, at the timing indicated by symbol T3 in FIG. 24, as shown in FIG. image), a blue 7 stock display BS (an image of the decorative pattern "blue 7") indicating the blue 7 stock state is displayed.

That is, in this example, when winning the specialized zone (blue 7) in the red 7 stock state, the red 7 stock display RS (decorative symbol "Red 7" image) and the blue 7 stock display BS (decorative symbol " The special zone (blue 7) that is advantageous for the player is prioritized over the special zone (red 7) without displaying both of the blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern "blue 7 ” image).

With such a configuration, it is possible to preferentially provide information on rights that are advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the convenience and willingness of the player to play.

The present invention is not limited to this. For example, both the red 7 stock display RS and the blue 7 stock display BS may be displayed. , the size of the blue 7 stock display BS may be made larger than the size of the red 7 stock display RS, or the blue 7 stock display BS may be displayed in front of the red 7 stock display RS.

<Priority of Stock (Example 1)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock State → Blue 7 Specialized Zone>
The state indicated by symbol T4 in FIG. 24 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 blue 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1, the number of blue 7 stocks=1) has shifted to the blue 7 specialized zone.

In the slot machine according to this example, after acquiring the first right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (red 7)), the second right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (blue 7)) right), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0), the second right (right that can be transferred to specialized zone (blue 7)) is configured to use

In the state indicated by symbol T4 in FIG. 24, a predetermined condition is established in a red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number=1, blue 7 stock number=1) in which blue 7 stock is obtained after obtaining red 7 stock. (In this example, the remaining G number of the AT1 set in the AT state is 0.) Therefore, the special zone (blue The right (second right) that can be transferred to 7) is preferentially used (Blue 7 priority), and is transferred to the Blue 7 specialized zone.

According to this example, regardless of the order in which rights are acquired (first right → second right), a predetermined right (second right) is preferentially digested, so processing that takes into account the order of acquisition (For example, processing to store the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are acquired, processing to update the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are consumed, etc.) Reduces the control burden on the gaming machine. , and stable game control can be performed.

<Stock priority (Example 1) / Blue 7 special zone → Red 7 stock>
The state indicated by reference numeral T5 in FIG. 24 is a state in which the blue 7 specialized zone is completed and the AT state of the red 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1) is entered.

In the same state, using (digesting) the right (second right) that can be transferred to the specialized zone (blue 7), the stock number of the specialized zone (blue 7) changes from 1 to 0, and the red 7 stock state Since (the number of red 7 stocks=1), as shown in FIG. image), the red 7 stock display RS (image of the decorative pattern "red 7") is displayed.

<Priority of Stock (Example 1) / AT State → Red 7 Specialized Zone>
The state indicated by reference numeral T6 in FIG. 24 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1) has shifted to the red 7 specialized zone.

In the same state, in the red 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stock = 1), the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the remaining G number of AT1 set in the AT state is 0), so the specialized zone ( Using the right (first right) that can be transferred to Red 7), it is transferred to the Red 7 specialized zone.

<Stock priority (Example 1) / Red 7 special zone → AT state (no stock)>
The state indicated by reference numeral T7 in FIG. 24 is a state in which the red 7 special zone is finished and the AT state with no stock in the special zone is entered.

In the same state, the right (first right) that can be transferred to the specialized zone (red 7) is used (digested), the stock number of the specialized zone (red 7) changes from 1 to 0, and the special zone (red 7) Since there is no stock, as shown in FIG. clearing the display.

<Stock Priority (Example 2)>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a game flow in stock priority (second embodiment).

Example 2 is an example in which when red 7 is stocked in a blue 7 stock state and blue 7 is further stocked, blue stock is preferentially digested twice.

<Priority of Stock (Example 2)/Blue 7 Stock State>
The state indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 25 is the state in which the M-th game (AT state) is started.

In the same state, the special zone lottery in the game before the M game (AT state) won the special zone (blue 7), and the blue 7 stock state (blue 7 stock number = 1), As shown in FIG. 25(a), in the lower right stock display area of the effect image display device 157, a blue 7 stock display BS (in this example, a blue 7 stock display BS indicating a blue 7 stock state (in this example, a decoration symbol "blue 7") is displayed. image) is displayed.

<Priority of Stock (Example 2)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock Status>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in FIG. 25 is the state in which the M+1th game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, the special zone lottery in the M+1 game (AT state) wins the special zone (red 7), and the red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 1, blue 7 stock number = 1) However, in this example, the blue 7 stock display BS (decorative symbol “blue 7” image) is preferentially displayed over the red 7 stock display RS (decorative symbol “red 7” image). ing.

Therefore, at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 25, the red 7 stock display RS (decorative symbol "red 7") is displayed in the lower right stock display area of the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. 25(b). The blue 7 stock display BS (the image of the decorative symbol “blue 7”) is continued without starting the blue 7 stock display BS (image of “blue 7”).

That is, in this example, when the special zone (red 7) is won in the blue 7 stock state, the red 7 stock display RS (decorative symbol "Red 7" image) and the blue 7 stock display BS (decorative symbol " The special zone (blue 7) that is advantageous for the player is prioritized over the special zone (red 7) without displaying both of the blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern "blue 7 ” image).

With such a configuration, it is possible to preferentially provide information on rights that are advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the convenience and willingness of the player to play.

<Priority of Stock (Example 2)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock Status>
The state indicated by reference symbol T4 in FIG. 25 is the state in which the M+8th game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, the special zone (blue 7) was won in the special zone lottery in the M+8 game (AT state), and the blue 7 stock state (blue 7 stock number = 2), but in this example, blue Even if the number of 7 stocks is 2 or more (when there are multiple blue 7 stocks), only one blue 7 stock display BS (decorative symbol “blue 7” image) is displayed. are doing.

Therefore, at the timing indicated by symbol T5 in FIG. 25, as shown in FIG. image) is displayed.

Although the explanation is omitted, when the number of red 7 stocks is 2 or more (when there are multiple red 7 stocks), the red 7 stock display RS (for example, the image of the decorative pattern "red 7" ) is configured to display only one.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the player of only the presence or absence of the right of the special zone, and the AT state ends before all the rights of the stock special zone are consumed. Even in the case where the player's desire to play is lost, it may be possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

The present invention is not limited to this example, and when the number of blue 7 stocks is two or more (when there are multiple blue 7 stocks), a plurality of blue 7 stock display BSs may be displayed. , when the number of red 7 stocks is two or more (when there are a plurality of red 7 stocks), a plurality of red 7 stocks RS may be displayed.

<Priority of Stock (Example 2) / Red 7 Blue 7 Stock State → Blue 7 Specialized Zone>
In FIG. 25, the state indicated by symbol T6 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 blue 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1, the number of blue 7 stocks=2) has shifted to the blue 7 specialized zone.

The slot machine according to this example acquires the second right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (blue 7)), and then the first right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (red 7)). right), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0), the second right (right that can be transferred to specialized zone (blue 7)) is configured to use

In the state indicated by symbol T6 in FIG. 25, a predetermined condition is established in a red 7 blue 7 stock state in which red 7 stock is obtained after blue 7 stock is obtained (red 7 stock number = 1, blue 7 stock number = 2). (In this example, the remaining G number of the AT1 set in the AT state is 0.) Therefore, the special zone (blue The right (second right) that can be transferred to 7) is preferentially used (Blue 7 priority), and is transferred to the Blue 7 specialized zone.

According to this example, even if both the first right and the second right are acquired, the second right, which is advantageous to the player, can be used preferentially. It can increase motivation. In addition, regardless of the order in which rights are acquired (second right → first right), a predetermined right (second right) is prioritized and processed in consideration of the order of acquisition (for example, right There is no need to store the number of rights and the order of acquisition of rights when acquiring rights, or to update the number of rights and the order of acquisition of rights when consuming rights, reducing the control burden on the gaming machine and stabilizing the Game control can be performed.

<Priority of Stock (Example 2)/Blue 7 Specialized Zone → Red 7 Blue 7 Stock State>
In FIG. 25, the state indicated by reference numeral T7 is a state in which the blue 7 specialized zone has ended and the state has shifted to the AT state of red 7 blue 7 stock (red 7 stock number=1, blue 7 stock number=1).

In the same state, using (digesting) the right (second right) that can be transferred to the special zone (blue 7), the stock number of the special zone (blue 7) will change from 2 to 1, red 7 blue 7 Stock state (red 7 stock number = 1, blue 7 stock number = 1), but in this example, blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern “red 7” image) is higher than red 7 stock display RS (decorative symbol “red 7” image) 25(d), blue 7 stock is displayed in the lower right stock display area of the effect image display device 157, as shown in FIG. 25(d). The display BS (the image of the decorative pattern "Blue 7") is continued.

<Priority of Stock (Example 2) / Red 7 Blue 7 Stock State → Blue 7 Specialized Zone>
In FIG. 25, the state indicated by symbol T8 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 blue 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1, the number of blue 7 stocks=1) has shifted to the blue 7 specialized zone.

In the slot machine according to this example, after acquiring the first right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (red 7)), the second right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (blue 7)) right), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0), the second right (right that can be transferred to specialized zone (blue 7)) is configured to use

In the state indicated by symbol T8 in FIG. 25, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a red 7 blue 7 stock state in which red 7 stock is obtained after blue 7 stock is obtained (red 7 stock number=1, blue 7 stock number=1). (In this example, the AT remaining G number in the AT state became 0), so the specialized zone (blue 7) is higher than the right (first right) that can be transferred to the specialized zone (red 7) The right (second right) that can be transferred to the Blue 7 zone is used preferentially (Blue 7 priority), and is transferred to the Blue 7 specialized zone.

According to this example, even if both the first right and the second right are acquired, the second right, which is advantageous to the player, can be used preferentially. It can increase motivation. In addition, regardless of the order in which rights are acquired (second right → first right), a predetermined right (second right) is prioritized and processed in consideration of the order of acquisition (for example, right There is no need to store the number of rights and the order of acquisition of rights when acquiring rights, or to update the number of rights and the order of acquisition of rights when consuming rights, reducing the control burden on the gaming machine and stabilizing the Game control can be performed.

<Stock priority (Example 2) / Blue 7 special zone → Red 7 stock>
The state indicated by reference numeral T9 in FIG. 25 is a state in which the blue 7 specialized zone is completed and the AT state of the red 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1) is entered.

In the same state, using (digesting) the right (second right) that can be transferred to the specialized zone (blue 7), the stock number of the specialized zone (blue 7) changes from 1 to 0, and the red 7 stock state Since (red 7 stock number=1), blue 7 stock display BS (decorative symbol “blue 7” image), the red 7 stock display RS (image of the decorative pattern "red 7") is displayed.

<Stock Priority (Example 3)>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a game flow in stock priority (Example 3).

This third embodiment is an example in which red 7 stocks and blue 7 stocks disappear when the AT state with 7 red 7 blue stocks (the number of red 7 stocks = 2, the number of blue 7 stocks = 1) shifts to the ending state. is.

<Priority of Stock (Example 3)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock Status>
The state indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 26 is the state in which the M-th game (AT state) is started.

In the same state, the special zone lottery in the game before the M game (AT state) wins twice in the special zone (red 7) and once in the special zone (blue 7), red 7 blue 7 stock (red 7 stock number = 2, blue 7 stock number = 1), but in this example, blue 7 stock display BS (decorative symbol 26(a), blue 7 stock is displayed in the lower right stock display area of the effect image display device 157, as shown in FIG. 26(a). BS (image of decorative pattern “Blue 7”) is displayed.

<Priority of Stock (Example 3)/Additional Lottery Winning>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in FIG. 26 is the state in which the M+2th game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, in the red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 2, blue 7 stock number = 1), the additional lottery is won, and 38 games are awarded as the number of additional games.

In the slot machine according to the present example, a condition (e.g., AT state) that is established when a certain value (e.g., the difference number of sheets to be acquired) exceeds a specified value (e.g., 2000 sheets) in a certain effect state (e.g., AT state) When a specific condition) is met, the system transitions to a specific state (e.g., ending (ED) state), and a certain value includes the acquired first right (e.g., red 7 stock) and the second right (e.g., It is configured to include a certain value (for example, the difference in the number of expected acquisitions in the specialized zone (red 7) and the specialized zone (blue)) when using the blue 7 stock).

As described above, in the slot machine according to the present example, when the difference number (certain value) in the AT state (certain effect state) reaches a specified value (for example, 2000) or more, the ending state (specific state ) (see route R8 in FIG. 8A).

Here, the "difference number (certain value)", which is the criterion for determining whether or not to shift to the ending state (specific state), includes 7 stocks of red (first right) or 7 stocks of blue (second right). ), the value of the probability of acquisition (expected acquisition) when using the acquired Red 7 stock (first right) and Blue 7 stock (second right) (for example, Includes the difference in the number of expected acquisitions (planned acquisitions) in the specialized zone (red 7) and specialized zone (blue).

For example, assuming that the average number of additional games in the specialized zone (blue) is 80 games, the average number of additional games in the specialized zone (red) is 40 games, and the net increase in the number of cards per game in the AT state is 3, as shown in FIG. In the M+2th game (AT state) indicated by symbol T2, red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 2, blue 7 stock number = 1), the number of acquired games (number of remaining games) is 260 games, plus Since the number of games is 38, the number of games expected to be won in the AT state is 458 games (=80 games x 1 + 40 games x 2 + 260 games + 38 games). There are 1374 cards (=458 games×3 cards).

Since the number of acquired medals (number of medals acquired) in the M+2 game (AT state) is 695, the difference in the number of medals in the AT state in the M+2 game (AT state) (including the expected difference in number of acquisition) is Since the number is 2069 (=1374+695) and reaches the specified value (2000 in this example), the game shifts to the ending state from the next game.

According to this example, it is possible to shift to the specific state in consideration of the number of games and the number of games expected to be obtained with the first right and the second right, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In this example, the number of additional games in the specialized zone (blue), the number of additional games in the specialized zone (red), the net increase in the number of games per game in the specialized zone, etc. are all examples, and this The invention is not limited to this.

<Priority of Stock (Example 3)/AT State→Ending State>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in FIG. 26 is a state in which the AT state has shifted to the ending state.

In this state, since the game has transitioned to the ending state, as shown in FIG. 26(b), an ending effect is executed to notify that the game has transitioned to the ending state.

Further, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a certain effect state (for example, AT state) shifts to a specific state (for example, ending (ED) state), the first right (for example, red 7 stock) or the second right (for example, red 7 stock) If a second right (eg, blue 7 stock) is acquired, the acquired right is designed to be extinguished.

In the state indicated by symbol T3 in FIG. 26, two red stocks (first right) and blue seven stocks (second Since one right has been acquired, each right has been extinguished, and the number of red 7 stocks and the number of blue 7 stocks are both 0.

According to this example, the value that is expected to be obtained when using the rights (for example, 7 stocks of red and 7 stocks of blue) that have been acquired as transition conditions for the ending is included, so the rights are acquired In some cases, there is a high possibility of transition to the ending (specific state), and there is a possibility that the right will be extinguished at the time of transition to the specific state. Therefore, by preferentially digesting the right (second right) that is advantageous to the player and minimizing the possibility that the advantageous right (second right) will be extinguished as much as possible, the player will feel disappointed. can be reduced and the desire to play can be sustained.

In this example, if the first right (for example, red 7 stock) or the second right (for example, blue 7 stock) is acquired when shifting to the ending state, the acquired Since the right is configured to be extinguished, as shown in FIG. 26, even if the AT state is shifted again from the ending state through the normal state, in the AT game, the special zone lottery again You do not win the first right (eg, red 7 stock) or the second right (eg, blue 7 stock) unless you win .

<Priority of Stock/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) provides rights (for example, special zone rights, etc.), wherein said rights include a first right (e.g. red 7 stock) and a second right (e.g. blue 7 stock) is included and the first right is acquired, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in the AT state becomes 0, the condition for transition to the specialized zone is (e.g., when the first right or the second right can be used, etc.), the first right may be used, and if the second right is acquired, the prescribed If the conditions are met, the second right may be used, and if the first right is acquired after the second right is acquired, the second right is acquired when the predetermined conditions are met. It is a game machine characterized by using.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if both the first right and the second right are acquired, the second right that is advantageous to the player can be used preferentially. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced. In addition, regardless of the order in which rights are acquired (second right → first right), a predetermined right (second right) is prioritized and processed in consideration of the order of acquisition (for example, right There is no need to store the number of rights and the order of acquisition of rights when acquiring rights, or to update the number of rights and the order of acquisition of rights when consuming rights, reducing the control burden on the gaming machine and stabilizing the Game control can be performed.

Further, when the second right is acquired after the first right is acquired, the second right may be used when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

With such a configuration, regardless of the order in which the rights are acquired (first right → second right), the predetermined right (second right) is given priority, so the order in which the rights are acquired is considered. (For example, processing to store the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are acquired, processing to update the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are consumed, etc.) can be reduced and stable game control can be performed.

In addition, in the certain effect state, when a specific condition is established, it shifts to a specific state (for example, ending state), and the specific condition is a certain value (for example, the difference number in the AT state, the number of games won in the AT state ) exceeds a specified value (for example, 2000 if the number of difference is 2000, 500 if the number of games), and the certain value includes the first right acquired and a value of the probability of obtaining (expected to obtain) when using the second right.

With such a configuration, it is possible to shift to a specific state in consideration of the number of games and the number of games expected to be obtained with the first right and the second right, so it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game. .

In addition, if the first right or the second right has been acquired when shifting from the certain production state to the specific state, even if the acquired right is extinguished good.

With such a configuration, even if many rights are acquired in a certain state of presentation, there is a possibility that the rights will be extinguished at the time of transition to a specific state, and the player's desire to play will be greatly reduced. However, since it is possible to give priority to the right (second right) that is advantageous to the player and make it difficult to extinguish the right, the player's disappointment is reduced and the desire to play is reduced. can be sustained.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment. , advantageous zone normal state, CZ, normal AT state, specialized zone, pullback chance zone, and ending state. Also, the "right advantageous to the player" is not limited to the specialized zone, and may be, for example, a right that can shift to a special state (for example, bonus).

[Other embodiments]
Next, slot machines according to other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 38. FIG. In the following description, the same configurations as those of the slot machine described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26 will be omitted, and only different configurations will be described.

The slot machine according to the present embodiment includes game state control means (eg, game state control processing shown in FIG. 4) for controlling the game state, and the game state includes a first game state (eg, FIG. 8). Non-advantageous section normal state, advantageous section normal state shown in (a)) and a second game state more advantageous than this first game state (for example, normal AT state, CZ, special state shown in FIG. 8 (a) zone, withdrawal chance zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc.), a first standby state, and a second standby state with a lower advantage than the first standby state.

<Press order guess before transition to second game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the pressing order guessing before shifting to the second game state will be described.

<Press order guess/push order bell before transition to the second game state>
First, the push order bell of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27(a) is a table showing the lottery probability of the pressing order bell of this embodiment, the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the operation contents of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the number of payouts, using FIG. 4 is a variation of the table described;

The slot machine according to the present embodiment includes internal winning result determination means (eg, internal winning combination lottery processing shown in FIG. 4) that determines the result of internal winning of a winning combination based on lottery information, , number information) is provided (for example, medal payout processing shown in FIG. 4, etc.), and a pushing order bell A and a pushing order bell B are provided as a winning combination (established combination).

The pressing order bells A and B in this example are composed of overlapping hands, and if the hand is internally won in the winning hand internal lottery process, the content of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, the order of the stop operation (stop The winning combinations are different depending on the order)), and the number of payouts is also different.

In the specification of the present application, (1) the stop operation in the order of left, middle, right is LCR operation, (2) the stop operation in the order of left, right, middle is LRC operation, and (3) the stop operation in the order of middle, left, right. (4) stop operation in the order of middle, right, left is called CRL operation, (5) stop operation in order of right, left, middle is called RLC operation, and (6) stop operation in the order of right, middle, left is called RCL operation. may be indicated.

The push order bell A of the present embodiment includes (1) a push order bell A_LCR (third result) whose correct stop operation is the LCR operation, and (2) a push order bell A_LRC whose correct stop operation is the LRC operation ( (third result), (3) pressing order bell A_CLR with CLR operation as the correct stop operation (second result), (4) pressing order bell A_CRL with CRL operation as the correct stop operation (second result) ), (5) pressing order bell A_RLC (first result) with RLC operation as the correct stop operation, and (6) pressing order bell A_RCL (first result) with RCL operation as the correct stop operation. subdivided into

On the other hand, the push order bell B of the present embodiment includes (1) a push order bell B_CLR (second result) whose correct stop operation is the CLR operation, and (2) a push order bell B_CLR whose correct stop operation is the CRL operation. B_CRL (second result), (3) Push order bell B_RLC (first result) where the RLC operation is the correct stop operation, (4) Push order bell B_RCL (first result) where the RCL operation is the correct stop operation result) is subdivided into four.

The lottery probability (winning probability) of the 6 overlapping hands that make up the pushing order bell A and the lottery probability (winning probability) of the 4 overlapping hands that make up the pushing order bell B are the same, 10% (=1/10). ), but in the push order B, there is a double combination of the push order bell B_LCR (third result) corresponding to the push order bell A_LCR and the push order bell B_LRC (third result) corresponding to the push order bell A_LRC. Since there is no overlapping combination, the winning probability of pushing order Bell A is 60% (=1/10×6), while the winning probability of pushing order Bell B is 40% (=1/10×4). , and the winning probability of pushing order bell B is lower than the winning probability of pushing order bell A.

In addition, when focusing on the first stop operation, the lottery probability (winning probability) of the push order bell A_LCR and the push order bell A_LRC in which the left first stop operation is the correct stop operation is 20% (1/10×2). On the other hand, the lottery probability (winning probability) of the pressing order bell A_CLR, pressing order bell A_CRL, pressing order bell B_CLR, and pressing order bell B_CRL in which the middle first stop operation is the correct stop operation, and the right first stop operation The lottery probability (winning probability) of the pushing order bell A_RLC, the pushing order bell A_RCL, the pushing order bell B_RLC, and the pushing order bell B_RCL for which is the correct stop operation is 40% (1/10×4).

Therefore, in the slot machine according to this example, the probability that the result of the internal winning is the first result (in this example, the push order bell A_RLC, the push order bell A_RCL, the push order bell B_RLC, and the push order bell B_RCL) (this In this example, the probability (20% in this example) of the third result (push order Bell A_LCR, push order Bell A_LRC in this example) is lower than the probability (20% in this example) that the internal winning result is the second result. result (in this example, push order bell A_CLR, push order bell A_CRL, push order bell B_CLR, push order bell B_CRL) is higher than the probability (40% in this example) of the third result (in this example, push The probability (in this example, 20%) of the first bell A_LCR and the second bell A_LRC is lower.

Note that the contents of the push order bells A and B are not limited to this example, and for example, the overlap of the push order bell B_LCR corresponding to the push order bell A_LCR and the overlap of the push order bell B_LRC equivalent to the push order bell A_LRC. After adding a role and making the number of overlapping hands constituting the pushing order bells A and B the same, the lottery probability (winning probability) of the overlapping role of pushing order bell B_LCR or pushing order bell B_LRC is set to other overlaps. It may be lower than the role.

For both of the push order bells A and B, when the stop operation (correct stop operation) is performed in the correct stop order, the first value (9 medals in this example) is given and the first stop is given. If only the correct stop operation is performed, a second value (in this example, one medal) is given, and if the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, Depending on the stop operation position (timing of stop operation) of the stop buttons 137 to 139, a case where a third value (in this example, one medal) is given or no value is given (in this example, medals are paid out may not be performed (so-called spillage).

In addition, the "first value", "second value", and "third value" according to the present invention are not limited to medals. In some cases, it may be game balls, and if the game table is an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine, it may be number information (electronic data corresponding to the number of medals or game balls). good. Also, the "first value" is preferably greater than the "second value" or the "third value".

Further, if the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, no value is given regardless of the stop operation position (timing of the stop operation) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (in this example, the medal payment is not performed).

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the pressing order bell A_LCR is internally won and the LCR operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell patterns are stop-displayed on the lower right line of the pattern display window 113. (the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), nine medals are paid out, and only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation. , When one medal is paid out and the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation of CLR operation, CRL operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation, the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped. Depending on the operation position (the timing of the stop operation), one medal may be paid out, or no medals may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_LRC is internally won and the LRC operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell symbols are stop-displayed on the upper horizontal line of the symbol display window 113 (display mode of the reels 110 to 112). becomes a predetermined display mode), nine medals are dispensed, and when the LCR operation in which only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation is performed, one medal is dispensed, If the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation such as CLR operation, CRL operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation, depending on the stop operation position (stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 There are cases where one medal is paid out and cases where no medals are paid out.

When the push order bell A_CLR (or push order bell B_CLR) is internally won and the CLR operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell patterns are stopped and displayed on the middle horizontal line of the pattern display window 113 ( display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), 9 medals are paid out, and only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation. medals are paid out, and the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, LCR operation, LRC operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation, the stop operation position of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ( Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one medal may be paid out, or no medals may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_CRL (or push order bell B_CRL) is internally won and the CRL operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell patterns are stop-displayed on the lower right line of the pattern display window 113 ( The display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), 9 medals are paid out, and only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation. medals are paid out, and the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, LCR operation, LRC operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation, the stop operation position of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ( Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one medal may be paid out, or no medals may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_RLC (or push order bell B_RLC) is internally won and the RLC operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell patterns are stopped and displayed on the lower horizontal line of the pattern display window 113 ( The display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), nine medals are paid out, and only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation. medals are paid out, and the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, LCR operation, LRC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation, the stop operation position of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ( Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one medal may be paid out, or no medals may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_RCL (or push order bell B_RCL) is internally won and the RCL operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell patterns are stop-displayed on the mountain line of the pattern display window 113 (reel 110 to 112 display mode becomes a predetermined display mode), 9 medals are paid out, and only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation. When medals are paid out and an LCR operation, LRC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation in which the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation is performed, the stop operation positions of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop Depending on the operation timing), one medal may be paid out, or no medals may be paid out.

<Press Order Prediction/Press Order Bell and AT Lottery Before Shifting to Second Game State>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27(b), the AT lottery in the case of winning the pushing order bell will be described. FIG. 27(b) is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the AT lottery when the winning order of the bell is won.

When winning the push order bell A or the push order bell B and pushing the order (LCR operation) or hitting with scissors (LRC operation or RLC operation) is performed, the AT lottery is compared to other cases. becomes advantageous. Here, "the AT lottery becomes advantageous" means that the probability of winning the AT lottery is increased, the number of additional games is increased when the AT lottery is won, and the like.

On the other hand, in the case of winning the push order bell A or push order bell B and irregular pushing (CLR operation, CRL operation, or RCL operation) is performed, the AT lottery is disadvantageous compared to other cases. become. Here, "the AT lottery becomes disadvantageous" means that the probability of winning the AT lottery is lowered, and the number of additional games to be played in the case of winning the AT lottery is reduced.

It should be noted that this penalty does not perform the AT lottery, and in the case of game nature such as shifting to AT game when digesting a specific number of games (if there is a so-called "ceiling" as the start condition of AT game) , stopping the counting of the specific number of games only for the game (or over several games).

<Press order win before transition to second game state/push order win success>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the change in the game state when the pushing order win (selection win) is successful will be described.

FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of game state changes, effects, etc., in the case of a successful push-order hit (choice hit).

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit successful/M game>
The state indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 28(a) is a state in which M (M is a positive integer) game number has been started.

The game state of the M game is an advantageous section normal state (first game state). In the M-th game, since the AT lottery was won after the replay (replay role) was internally won, as shown in FIG. As part of this, a special effect (in this example, display of a character string "Victory" and display of a character image of Tono) is executed to suggest that the player has won the AT lottery.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit successful/M+1 game>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in FIG. 28(a) is the state in which the M+1th game next to the Mth game is started.

The game state of the M+1 game is a waiting state (first waiting state) before shifting to the AT game. In this example, since the AT lottery was won in the M game, from the advantageous section normal state (first game state), to the standby state (first standby state) which is the state before shifting to the AT game there is In this waiting state (first waiting state), when a specific winning combination is internally won or when a specific number is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, an additional lottery 1 is performed. ing.

FIG. 28(b) is a diagram showing an example of winning combinations for which the additional lottery 1 is executed and winning probabilities of the additional lottery 1. FIG.

In this example, when watermelon, weak cherry, and strong cherry are internally won, or when the chance number is stop-displayed in the symbol display window 113, the extra lottery 1 is executed. Each additional winning probability is 10% for watermelon, 15% for chance, 10% for weak cherry, and 15% for strong cherry.

In the M+1th game, replay (replay role) is internally won, and watermelon, weak cherry, and strong cherry are not internally won, and the chance number is not stop-displayed in the symbol display window 113. Lottery 1 was not executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a certain condition is established in the first waiting state (for example, waiting state) (the result of internal winning is the first result (for example, pushing order bell A_RLC, pushing order bell A_RCL, (Press order bell B_RLC, press order bell B_RCL)), the operation mode of a plurality of stop operation means (for example, the order of operating the stop operation means (for example, the order of stopping the stop buttons 137 to 139), the stop target and It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, pressing order prediction effect) for causing the player to select a symbol (a target symbol)).

Incidentally, in this example, the pushing-order guess effect is executed only when the AT hits for the first time. For example, in an AT with a predetermined number of games in one set, when winning the next set (second run) AT, completing the number of games of the AT, and shifting to the next set (second run) AT does not execute a predetermined effect (for example, pressing order guess effect).

In the M+1th game, the replay (replay role) is internally won, and the push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, and push order bell B_RCL (first result) are not internally won. Therefore, as shown in (a-2) of the same figure, the effect image display device 157 is used to perform the pressing order guess effect (predetermined effect), and the standby state (first standby state) is established. A waiting state effect (in this example, displaying a character string “waiting”) is executed.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit successful/M+2 game>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in FIG. 28(a) is the state where the M+2th game next to the M+1th game is started.

The game state of the M+2 game is a waiting state (first waiting state) before shifting to the AT game. In this example, in the standby state (first standby state) of the M+1 game, the pressing order guess effect (predetermined effect) is not executed (the condition to shift to the AT state (second game state) is established. There is no), the standby state (first standby state), which is the state before the AT game shift, is continued.

In addition, in the M+2 game, the strong cherry is internally won, and the additional lottery 1 is executed, but the push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, and push order bell B_RCL (first result ) is not internally won, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the standby state effect (in this example, the character string “waiting”) without executing the pressing order guess effect (predetermined effect). display) is running.

<Push order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit successful/M+4th game>
The state indicated by symbol T4 in FIG. 28(a) is the state where the M+4th game next to the M+3th game is started.

The game state of the M+4th game is a standby state (first standby state) before shifting to the AT game. In this example, in the standby state (first standby state) of the M+3 game, the pressing order guess effect (predetermined effect) is not executed (the condition to shift to the AT state (second game state) is established. not), the standby state (first standby state) is continued.

In addition, in the M+4th game, since the push order bell (RCL), that is, the push order bell A_RCL or the push order bell B_RCL is internally won, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the push order guess effect (predetermined production) and standby state production (in this example, display of a character string "waiting") are executed.

Although there is no particular limitation on the effect mode of the pressing order guess effect (predetermined effect), in this example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and an effect is performed in which the display of "?" LCR operation or LRC operation where the first stop operation is right) or the second operation order (in this example performs an effect suggesting that a CLR operation or a CRL operation in which the first stop operation is inside is recommended.

In addition, the "predetermined effect" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. Although it is suggested, it may be an effect that does not shift to the AT game unless the target pattern is hit.

According to this example, the player can be made to perform the stop operation in the first operation order or the second operation order without performing the stop operation in the third operation order, leading to the recommended game. can be done.

Further, as described above, in the slot machine according to this example, the result of internal winning is the first result (in this example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL). The probability (in this example, 20%) of the third result (in this example, pushing order bell A_LCR, pushing order bell A_LRC) is lower than the probability (in this example, 40%), and the internal winning result is the second result (in this example, push order bell A_CLR, push order bell A_CRL, push order bell B_CLR, push order bell B_CRL) than the third result (in this example, 40%). , the probability (20% in this example) of pressing order bell A_LCR, pressing order bell A_LRC) is lower, so an effect suggesting that the third operation order is not recommended (in this example, pressing order is By not allowing the player to perform the stop operation in the third operation order, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the percentage of the internal lottery results in the third result is small. can be done. Moreover, even for advanced players who know that the ratio of the internal lottery results to the third result is small, the production will not be troublesome and the desire to play will not be diminished.

In this example, the pressing order guessing effect is executed when the AT hits for the first time, and the pressing order guessing effect is not executed at the start of the second AT, but the present invention is not limited to this. At the start of the AT for a certain number of times (for example, the 10th run), it may be constructed such that the pressing order guess effect is executed. Also, the AT state after a certain number of times may be a game state more advantageous to the player than the AT state before the certain number of times.

At a predetermined timing in the AT state after a certain number of times (for example, the 20th run or a specified number of payouts, etc.), the AT state may be shifted to the AT state before the certain number of times. Even in such a case, it is sufficient to execute the pressing-order matching effect before shifting to the AT state before a certain number of times.

With such a configuration, when the degree of advantage changes, the push order guess effect is performed again, so that the game can be sharpened, the interest in the game can be enhanced, and in addition, the push order guess effect can be performed. Occurrences can suggest varying degrees of advantage.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit successful/M+5th game>
The state indicated by symbol T5 in FIG. 28(a) is the state where the M+5th game next to the M+4th game is started.

In the slot machine according to this example, in the first case (when the internal winning result is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL)) In a game in which a predetermined effect (for example, pressing order guess effect) is executed, stop operation means (for example, stop button 137 ~ 139) is operated, the game state is configured to shift from the first standby state (eg, standby state) to the second game state (eg, AT state).

In this example, in the standby state (first standby state) of the M+4th game in which the push order bell (RCL) is internally elected and the push order guess effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the first stop operation is right. Since the right stop button 139 (stop operation means) is operated by the RLC operation or RCL operation (first operation order), in the M+5th game, the game state is changed from the standby state (first standby state) to AT state (second game state).

According to this example, depending on the order of operation of the stop operation means, the first standby state (in this example, standby state) may or may not shift to the second game state (in this example, AT state). Therefore, when shifting to the second game state, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction that he was able to shift to the second game state by his own stop operation, and the second game state can be given. Motivation to play can be enhanced even after the shift.

FIG. 28(a-4) shows that in the waiting state of the M+4th game in which the pressing order bell (RCL) is internally won and the pressing order winning effect is executed, the stop button 139 is pressed by the RLC operation in which the first stop operation is right. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of each display of the symbol display window 113, the stored number display 125, and the effect image display device 157 when operated.

In this example, since the game state shifts from the standby state (first standby state) to the AT state (second game state), in the effect image display device 157, instead of the standby state effect and the pressing order effect, , A push order guessing success effect (in this example, a display of a character string "prepared" indicating that an AT game is to be started) is performed.

Further, when the pressing order bell A_RCL (or the pressing order bell B_RCL) is internally won and the RCL operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell patterns are stop-displayed on the mountain line of the pattern display window 113 . , 9 medals (first value) are paid out.

In addition, FIG. 28(a-4') shows that, in the standby state of the M+4th game in which the push order bell (RCL) is internally won and the push order guess effect is executed, the first stop operation is the right RLC operation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of each display of the symbol display window 113, the stored number display 125, and the effect image display device 157 when the button 139 is operated.

In this example, since the game state shifts from the standby state (first standby state) to the AT state (second game state), the effect image display device 157 displays the standby state effect (in this example, "waiting ” character string display), an AT game start effect (in this example, the display of the character string “preparation complete”) that suggests starting the AT game is performed.

In addition, when the push order bell A_RCL (or the push order bell B_RCL) is internally won, and only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation and the RLC operation is performed, one medal (second value) is performed. is paid out.

According to this example, not only the case where the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, but also the case where the RLC operation, in which only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation, is performed, is regarded as the correct stop operation. (in this example, the AT state), it is possible to prevent the degree of difficulty of the push order guess from becoming too high, prevent the player's desire to play from declining, and achieve a push order guess effect. can be prevented from becoming a troublesome performance for the player. In addition, by providing a different value to be given even in the operation order of the stop operation that shifts to the second game state (AT state in this example), it is possible to provide a new game feature that has not existed in the past. , can increase the interest of the player.

In the AT state (second game state), when a specific winning combination is internally won or when a specific number is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, an additional lottery 2 is performed. there is

FIG. 28(c) is a diagram showing an example of the winning combination for which the additional lottery 2 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 2. As shown in FIG.

In this example, when watermelon, weak cherry, and strong cherry are internally won, or when the chance number is stop-displayed in the symbol display window 113, the extra lottery 2 is executed. The odds of winning are 15% for watermelon, 20% for chance, 15% for weak cherry, and 20% for strong cherry. It is higher than the winning probability of 1.

That is, the additional lottery 2 in the AT state (second gaming state) is a lottery more advantageous to the player than the additional lottery 1 in the standby state (first standby state). In addition, the numerical value of the winning probability of the additional lottery 2 is not limited to this example, and the additional lottery in the AT state (second gaming state) is more for the player than the additional lottery in the standby state (first standby state). It is good if it is advantageous.

Therefore, for example, in the standby state (first standby state), the additional lottery may not be performed, or the number of winning combinations for which the additional lottery is performed may be made smaller than in the AT state (second gaming state). For example, in the AT state (second game state), an additional lottery is performed when a watermelon or a weak cherry is internally won, but in the standby state (first standby state), an additional lottery is performed only when a weak cherry is internally won. It may be configured to perform a lottery.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit failure>
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a change in the game state in the case of failure in pressing order (selection) will be described.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of changes in the game state, effects, etc., in the case of failure in pressing order guessing (selective guessing). In addition, the flow of the game up to the start of the first pressing order guess effect indicated by symbols T1 to T3 in FIG. Since the flow is substantially the same, the description thereof will be omitted, and the following description will be made from the end of the M+2 game indicated by reference numeral T4 in FIG.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/Push order hit failure/End of M+2 game>
The state indicated by symbol T4 in FIG. 29(a) is the state in which the M+2th game has been completed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in the first case (when the internal winning result is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL)) In a game in which a predetermined effect (for example, pressing order guess effect) is executed, stop operation means (for example, stop button 137 ~ 139) is operated, the second waiting state (eg, waiting state 2) without shifting the gaming state from the first waiting state (eg, waiting state) to the second gaming state (eg, AT state) ).

In this example, in the waiting state (first waiting state) of the M+2th game in which the pushing order bell (RCL) is internally won and the pushing order winning effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the first stop operation is left or middle. Since the left stop button 137 or the middle stop button 138 (stop operation means) is operated by the LCR operation, LC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation (first operation order), the M+2 game next In the game, the game state is shifted from the standby state (first standby state) to the standby state 2 (second standby state).

In the standby state 2 (second standby state), when a specific winning combination is internally won or when a specific number is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, an additional lottery 3 is performed. ing.

FIG. 29(b) is a diagram showing an example of winning combinations for which the additional lottery 3 is executed and winning probabilities of the additional lottery 3. As shown in FIG.

In this example, when watermelon, weak cherry, and strong cherry are internally won, or when the chance number is stop-displayed in the symbol display window 113, the extra lottery 3 is executed. Each additional winning probability is 0% for watermelon, 0% for chance, 5% for weak cherry, and 0% for strong cherry. 1 and the winning probability of the additional lottery 2 explained with reference to FIG. 28(c).

That is, the additional lottery 3 in the standby state 2 (second standby state) is more for the player than the additional lottery 2 in the AT state (second gaming state) and the additional lottery 1 in the standby state (first standby state). Unfavorable lottery. In addition, the numerical value of the winning probability of the additional lottery 3 is not limited to this example, and the advantage of the standby state 2 (second standby state) is the standby state (first standby state) or the AT state (second It should be lower than the advantage degree of the game state).

Therefore, for example, in the standby state 2 (second standby state), the additional lottery may not be performed, or the number of winning combinations to perform the additional lottery may be changed in the standby state (first standby state) or the AT state ( For example, in the standby state (first standby state) or AT state (second game state), if watermelon or weak cherry is internally elected, an additional lottery is performed. However, in the standby state 2 (second standby state), it may be constructed such that the additional lottery is performed only when the weak cherry is internally elected.

According to this example, it is possible to make the player aware that he/she could not shift to the second game state (AT state in this example) due to his/her own stop operation, thereby preventing the player from losing his or her desire to play. . Further, if the degree of advantage of the second standby state is high, there is a concern that the second standby state may be prolonged. By making it lower than the standby state (in this example, standby state) (by significantly lowering the advantage of the second standby state (in this example, standby state 2)), the extension of the second standby state can be prevented.

FIG. 29(a-4) shows an LCR operation and an LC operation in which the first stop operation is left or middle in the standby state of the M+2 game in which the push order bell (RCL) is internally won and the push order winning effect is executed. , CLR operation, or CRL operation, when the left stop button 137 or the middle stop button 138 is operated, the figure showing an example of each display of the symbol display window 113, the stored number display 125, and the effect image display device 157. is.

In this example, since the game state shifts from the standby state (first standby state) to the standby state 2 (second standby state), the effect image display device 157 erases the pressing order guess effect and waits. Instead of the state effect, a push order failure effect (in this example, displays a character string "waiting" and darkens the background color during the push order guess effect (darkening display) is performed).

In addition, LCR operation, LRC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation in which the push order bell A_RCL (or push order bell B_RCL) is internally won and the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation (third stop order) is performed, if the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is the pressing timing 1, as shown in FIG. is not given), but when the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is the pressing timing 2 different from the pressing timing 1, as shown in FIG. medals (third value) are paid out.

According to this example, even if the transition to the second gaming state (AT state in this example) could not be performed, a value (one medal in this example) may be awarded. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit failure/M+4th game>
The state indicated by symbol T5 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where the M+4th game is started.

The game state of the M+4th game is the standby state 2 (second standby state) before shifting to the AT game. In the M+4th game, the pressing order guess effect (predetermined effect) is not executed in the standby state 2 (second standby state) (the condition for shifting to the AT state (second game state) is not established). Therefore, the standby state 2 (second standby state) is continued.

In addition, in the M+4th game, since the push order bell (LCR), that is, the push order bell A_LCR is internally won, the push order guess effect (predetermined effect) is not executed, but the standby state 2 (second Since the second standby state) continues, the standby state rendering is executed using the rendering image display device 157, as shown in FIG.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit failure/M+5th game>
The state indicated by symbol T6 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where the M+5th game is started.

The game state of the M+5th game is the standby state 2 (second standby state) before shifting to the AT game. In the M+5th game, the pressing order guess effect (predetermined effect) is not executed in the standby state 2 (second standby state) (the condition for shifting to the AT state (second game state) is not established). Therefore, the standby state 2 (second standby state) is continued.

Further, in the M+5th game, since the internal lottery was lost, the pressing order prediction effect (predetermined effect) is not executed.

<Press order hit before transition to second game state/push order hit failure/M+6 game>
The state indicated by symbol T7 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where the M+6th game is started.

In the M+6th game, since the push order bell (CRL), that is, the push order bell A_CRL or the push order bell B_CRL is internally won, the effect image display device 157 is turned on as shown in FIG. is used to execute a pressing order matching effect (predetermined effect) and a waiting state effect (in this example, display of a character string "waiting") in the same manner as when the pressing order bell (RCL) is internally won. there is

<Press Order Prediction/Summary before Shifting to Second Game State>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 112), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and the stop operation Based on this, stop control means for stopping the plurality of reels (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 4), and internal winning result determination means for determining the result of internal winning based on the lottery information (for example, in FIG. 4 winning combination internal lottery process shown), game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, game state control process shown in FIG. 4), effect means for executing effects (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, 1st sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. Non-advantageous section normal state, advantageous section normal state) and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state (for example, normal AT state, CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance shown in FIG. 8(a) zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc.) and a first standby state (for example, the standby state shown in FIG. 29 (a-3 ), and the certain condition is that the result of the internal winning is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the game state control means performs the first operation in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case. When the stop operation means is operated in a mode (for example, RLC operation or RCL operation in which the first stop operation is right), the game state is changed from the first standby state to the second game state. In the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode (for example, a CLR operation or a CRL operation in which the first stop operation is in the middle), The amusement machine is characterized in that it is means for not shifting the game state from the first standby state to the second game state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means, there is a case where the first standby state transitions to the second game state and a case where it does not shift, so the second game In the case of shifting to the state, the player can be given a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction that he/she has been able to shift to the second game state by his/her own stop operation, and even after shifting to the second game state, the player will be motivated to play. can be enhanced.

In addition, the game state includes a second standby state (for example, standby state 2 shown in FIG. 30), and the game state control means controls, in the game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, the The game state may be shifted from the first standby state to the second standby state when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that he/she could not shift to the second game state due to his/her own stop operation, thereby preventing the player's desire to play from declining.

Further, the certain condition includes a case where the result of the internal winning is a second result (for example, bell A_CLR in pushing order, bell A_CRL in pushing order, bell B_CLR in pushing order, bell B_CRL in pushing order). is the third result (for example, push order bell A_LCR, push order bell A_LRC). The display mode of the plurality of reels can be a predetermined display mode, and the second result is that when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display mode of the plurality of reels The display mode can be a predetermined display mode, and the third result is that the plurality of When the stop operation means is operated, the display mode of the plurality of reels can be a predetermined display mode, and the predetermined effect is an effect suggesting that the third operation mode is not recommended. An effect suggesting that the first operation mode or the second operation mode is recommended (for example, an “X” is displayed on the left side of the display area of the effect image display device 157, and an effect image is displayed. may be an effect in which the display of "?"

With such a configuration, the player is not required to perform the stop operation in the third operation mode (operation order), and the player is stopped in the first operation mode (operation order) or the second operation mode (operation order). It can be operated and lead to a recommended game.

Further, the probability (for example, 20%) that the result of the internal election is the third result is lower than the probability (for example, 40%) that the result of the internal election is the first result, and the result of the internal election is the The probability of the third outcome (eg, 20%) may be lower than the probability of the second outcome (eg, 40%).

With such a configuration, the internal lottery is performed by not allowing the player to perform the stop operation in the third operation order by providing an effect suggesting that the third operation mode (operation order) is not recommended. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the ratio of the third result is small as a result of the above.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and based on the stop operation, the Stop control means for stopping a plurality of reels (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 4) and internal winning result determination means for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information (for example, internal lottery processing), game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, game state control processing shown in FIG. 4), and value giving means for giving values (for example, medals, number information) (for example, shown in FIG. 4) medal payout process, etc.) and effect means for executing effects (for example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. 2) The game state is a first game state (for example, a non-advantageous section normal state, an advantageous section normal state shown in FIG. 8A), and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state. game state (for example, normal AT state, CZ, specialized zone, withdrawal chance zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc. shown in FIG. 8(a)) and first standby state (for example, shown in FIG. 29 standby state), and the effect means determines the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation means (for example, the order of pressing, the symbol to be a stop target, etc.) when a certain condition is satisfied in the first standby state. 29(a-3)) for allowing the player to select the target symbol, and the certain condition is the internal winning is a first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL) (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and the game The state control means changes the game state to the first state when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode (for example, RLC operation) in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case. It is a means for shifting from the standby state to the second game state, and in the game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, a second operation mode (for example, LRC operation, RCL operation, CLR operation, CRL operation) does not shift the game state from the first standby state to the second game state when the stop operation means is operated, and the value giving means is the predetermined value in the first case means for imparting a first value (for example, nine medals) when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation mode in the game in which the effect of is executed, and in the first case The amusement machine is characterized in that, in a game in which the predetermined effect is executed, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation mode, the means does not impart the first value.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means, there is a case where the first standby state transitions to the second game state and a case where it does not shift, so the second game In the case of shifting to the state, the player can be given a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction that he/she has been able to shift to the second game state by his/her own stop operation, and even after shifting to the second game state, the player will be motivated to play. can be enhanced.

Further, the game state control means, in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case, when the plurality of stop operation means is operated in a third operation mode (for example, RCL operation), the game Means for shifting the state from the first standby state to the second game state, and the value imparting means performs the third operation mode in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case. is a means for imparting a second value (for example, one medal) when the plurality of stop operation means are operated, and the first value is a value greater than the second value. good.

With such a configuration, when the stop operation is performed not only in the first operation mode (stop order) but also in the third operation mode (stop order), the transition to the second game state is performed. It is possible to prevent the degree of difficulty of pushing order guessing from becoming too high, prevent a player's desire to play from declining, and prevent the pushing order guessing performance from becoming a troublesome performance for the player. In addition, by providing different values to be given even in the operation order of the stop operation that shifts to the second game state, it is possible to provide a new game feature that has not existed in the past, and to increase the interest of the player. can be done.

Further, the value imparting means may add a third value (e.g., medal 1 card), and the third value may be a smaller value than the first value.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining by providing a value even when the game state cannot be shifted to the second game state.

In addition, the game state includes a second standby state (for example, standby state 2 shown in FIG. 30), and the game state control means controls, in the game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, the When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, the game state is changed from the first standby state to the second standby state, and the second standby state is the first It may be in a state in which the degree of advantage is lower than in the standby state of .

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that he/she could not shift to the second game state due to his/her own stop operation, thereby preventing the player's desire to play from declining. Also, if the advantage of the second standby state is high, there is a concern that the second standby state will be prolonged, but by making the advantage of the second standby state lower than the first standby state, It is possible to prevent the extension of the second standby state.

<Display of acquired value>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the value acquisition amount display will be described. FIGS. 30(a) to 30(g) are diagrams showing an example of display of the acquired value in chronological order.

As described with reference to FIG. 23A and the like, in the slot machine according to this example, in a certain game state (for example, AT state), the number of games display (for example, AT remaining G number display) and the acquisition amount display (for example, the number of acquisitions) indicating the amount of value (for example, medals) acquired (for example, the number of acquisitions) can be displayed. It is configured to be able to display a given game count display (for example, AT added G number display) that indicates the given game count.

The state shown in FIG. 30(a) is the state in which the final game of the AT game is started.

In this state, in the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a level display indicating the game level of the player (in this example, a character string “Lv. meter display) is displayed, and in the upper right of the display area, the number of medals obtained is displayed (in this example, the character string "1000" is displayed), and in the center of the display area, AT A display indicating that the game is the last game (in this example, a display of an image including the character string "Last") is displayed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(b) is a state in which the final game of the AT game is finished and the AT end effect AE is started.

In the same state, when the condition for starting the AT end effect is established (in this example, the third stop operation is performed in the final game of the AT game), the AT end that suggests ending the AT state. Production AE is started. It should be noted that the start condition of the AT end effect is not limited to this example, for example, that the winning judgment is completed in the final game of the AT game, that the medals are paid out in the final game of the AT game, that the AT game It may be the end of the AT game effect in the final game.

The AT end effect AE of this example includes one or a plurality of displays (for example, background image BG, acquired display image GP, blessing display SP, character image CP, dialogue display JP, etc.) displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157, , and one or a plurality of output sounds (for example, sound effect BS, etc.) output from the speakers 272 and 277 . In place of (or in addition to) the display and the output sound, effects such as lamps and movable bodies may be performed.

The background image BG that constitutes the AT end effect AE is displayed on the backmost surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and is an image that serves as a background for the effect. display mode is different. For example, if the number of acquisitions at the end of the final game of the AT game is 1000 or more, the blue background image BG is displayed, and if the number of acquisitions at the end of the final game of the AT game is 1001 or more and 2000 or less, A yellow background image BG is displayed, and a red background image is displayed when the obtained number of sheets at the end of the final game of the AT game is 2001 or more.

In addition, the background image BG may function as a setting suggestion image that suggests the current setting value. For example, if the current setting value is 5 or more, the setting value is 5 or more. setting suggestion image (for example, an image containing a character string such as "setting 5 or more confirmed" or "setting 5 or more?") is included in the background image BG, and if the current setting value is an odd number, the setting A setting suggesting image suggesting that the value is an odd number (for example, an image including a character string "is the setting value an odd number?") is included in the background image BG and displayed.

Acquisition display image GP and blessing display SP constituting AT end effect AE, "specific image" according to the present invention, in this example, over a predetermined time (over a predetermined time), AT game It consists of an animation (moving image) that displays the number of winnings at the end of the final game in stages.

In addition, the "specific image" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, for example, a certain game state (non-advantageous section normal state, advantageous section normal state, normal AT state, CZ, special zone, withdrawal chance zone , ending state, pseudo-bonus, etc.).

In addition, it is not limited to the image including the number of acquisitions at the end of the final game of the AT game. It may be an image including a given game number display (for example, AT added G number display) indicating the number of games newly given in the special zone). Also, it may be an image containing numerical values or character strings indicating newly awarded points, items, rights, etc. in a certain game state.

Also, for example, when the effect during the game is displayed for the first time, it is displayed with animation, but it is displayed again after the menu display by pressing the button or the demo effect that transitions due to no game for a certain period of time ends. In some cases, it may be displayed without animation.

The blessing display SP that constitutes the AT end effect AE is composed of an animation display (moving image display) in which symbols (character strings, symbols, etc.) are gradually enlarged and displayed over a predetermined period of time. Then, the display mode differs depending on the number of winnings at the end of the final game of the AT game.

FIG. 30(h) is a diagram showing an example of the symbols forming the blessing display SP, the number of obtained symbols, the initial display time, and the re-display time corresponding to each symbol.

For example, when the winning number at the end of the final game of the AT game is 1000 or less, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the character string "Cool" is displayed for 0.99 s (30 frames) (0.99 s). An animation display (moving image display) that expands in stages over a period of 99 seconds is performed, and when redisplayed, the character string (still image) of "Cool" is displayed for 33 ms (1 frame) (33 ms). over). Also, if the number of acquired sheets is 1001 or more and 2000 or less, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the character string "Excellent" is displayed for 1.65 s (50 frames) (1.65 s animation display (moving image display) that expands step by step), and when redisplaying, a character string (still image) of "Excellent" is displayed for 33 ms (1 frame) (with a time of 33 ms). do.

In addition, when the number of acquired sheets is 2001 or more, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the character string "Unbelievable" is displayed for 2.31 s (70 frames) (over 2.31 s) An animation display (moving image display) that expands in stages is performed, and when redisplayed, a character string (still image) of "Unbelievable" is displayed for 33 ms (1 frame) (with a time of 33 ms).

That is, in this example, the symbol and initial display time (playback time of animation display (moving image display)) are configured to be different according to the type of blessing display SP. time) are set to the same time (33 ms (1 frame)). Also, the time for redisplaying the blessing display SP (33 ms (1 frame) in this example) is set to be shorter than the minimum time for displaying the blessing display SP for the first time (0.99 s in this example). so that the redisplay time does not become longer than necessary.

The sound effect BS that constitutes the AT end effect AE is an output sound output from the speakers 272 and 277 together with the blessing display SP. , the output mode differs depending on the number of coins acquired at the end of the final game of the AT game.

For example, when the winning number at the end of the final game of the AT game is 1000 or less, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the sound effect BS "Cool" is repeatedly output for 0.99 seconds, When redisplaying, the sound effect BS is not output. Also, if the number of acquired cards is 1001 or more and 2000 or less, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the sound effect BS "Excellent" is output repeatedly for 1.65 seconds, and when it is displayed again , no sound effect BS is output.

In addition, when the acquired number is 2001 or more, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the sound effect BS "Unbelievable" is output repeatedly for 2.31 seconds, and when it is displayed again, the sound effect BS does not output. That is, in this example, the initial output time is set to be different depending on the type of sound effect SP, but the re-output time is set to the same time (0 seconds, not output). Note that the sound effect BS may be output during at least part of the animation display of the blessing display SP.

The character image CP and dialogue display JP that constitute the AT end effect AE are displays displayed in order to enhance the effect of the AT end effect AE, and the display mode is not particularly limited. The display mode may be different depending on the number of winning coins at the end of the final game.

Therefore, for example, for the character image CP, if the number of acquisitions at the end of the final game of the AT game is 1000 or less, the character image of Tono is displayed, and if the number of acquisitions is 1001 or more and 2000 or less , the character image of the old man may be displayed, and when the number of obtained cards is 2001 or more, the character image of the princess may be displayed.

In addition, regarding the dialogue display JP, when the number of acquired sheets at the end of the final game of the AT game is 1000 or less, a character string "Congratulations!" , a character string "Over 1,000!" may be displayed, and if the number of acquired cards is 2,001 or more, a character string "Over 2,000!" may be displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 30(c) is a state in which the acquired display image GP is displayed in the first AT end effect AE.

In the slot machine according to this example, when the specific image is displayed at the first timing (certain timing in the display period of the end image suggesting that the AT state is to be terminated), the first time longer than the second time is displayed. (for example, displaying the specific image with animation).

In the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the acquired display image GP (specific image) is displayed during the display period of the first AT end effect AE (end image suggesting the end of the AT state). At the timing shown in FIG. (b), after starting the display of the character image CP (still image) and the dialogue display JP (still image), at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. and the output of the sound effect BS are started, and until the re-display start condition of the AT end effect AE is satisfied (in this example, until the effect button 192 is operated), the obtained display image GP and the blessing display By continuing the animation display of SP and the output of sound effect BS, the acquisition display image GP (specific image) is displayed with animation.

The state shown in (e) of the same figure is a state in which the display start animation of the obtained display image GP and the blessing display SP has ended.

After the display start animation of the acquisition display image GP and the blessing display SP is finished, the final display of the animation display of the acquisition display image GP and the blessing display SP continues to be displayed as a still image. Even after the display start animation ends, instead of a still image, an animated image may be displayed with a shaking image or an effect. Even in this case, the time relationship of the display start animation is preferably as shown in FIG. 30(h).

Note that the AT end effect AE may be executed repeatedly until the redisplay start/end condition is satisfied (until the effect button 192 is operated), or after it is executed once, the obtained display image GP and the blessing The animation display of the display SP may be maintained at the final display, and the output of the sound effect BS may be stopped. Moreover, although an example in which both the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP are displayed as animation has been shown, either one may be a still image and only the other may be displayed as an animation.

The state shown in FIG. 30(f) is a state in which the obtained display image GP and the blessing display SP are erased (the display of the character image CP, the dialogue display JP, and the background image BG continues).

In the same state, since the end conditions for the acquisition display image GP and the blessing display SP are satisfied (in this example, the effect button 192 is operated), the initial acquisition display image GP and the initial acquisition display image GP shown in FIG. The display of the blessing display SP is erased.

It should be noted that the conditions for ending the acquisition display image GP and the blessing display SP are not limited to this example, and may be, for example, that an operation is performed by an operation means (for example, a menu button) other than the effect button 192, or that the AT end effect AE is executed. It may be that a predetermined time has passed since the start.

According to this example, it is possible for the player to delete the obtained display image GP and the blessing display SP, which are obstructive when viewing the background image BG, by the player's own operation, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

Further, in the slot machine according to the present example, when the specific image is displayed at the second timing after the first timing (a certain timing in the display period of the end image suggesting the end of the AT state), , the specific image is displayed for a second time shorter than the first time (the specific image is displayed without animation).

In the state shown in (g) of the same figure, triggered by the fact that the effect button 192 is operated while the character image CP (still image) and the dialog display JP (still image) shown in (f) of the same figure are being displayed, By displaying the obtained display image GP (still image) and the blessing display SP (still image) for 33 ms (1 frame) without outputting the sound effect BS, no specific sound is output and no animation is involved. An acquired display image GP (specific image) is displayed.

According to this example, when the specific image (acquired display image GP in this example) is redisplayed, the specific image is displayed for a second period of time shorter than the first period of time (for example, an animation is displayed). By displaying the specific image without accompanying the game, it is possible to reduce annoyance given to the player and prevent a decline in motivation to play.

Further, by not outputting a specific sound (sound effect GP in this example) when displaying a specific image (acquired display image GP in this example) without animation, annoyance given to the player is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decline of motivation to play.

In this example, an example is shown in which neither the acquisition display image GP nor the blessing display SP are displayed in animation, but the "specific image" according to the present invention may be a still image and other displays may be displayed in animation. . Further, the condition for starting re-display of the "specific image" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. It may be that a predetermined time has passed since the start of the ending effect AE.

<Display of acquired value/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) can display a specific image (for example, the acquisition display image GP and the blessing display SP shown in FIG. 30(c)). display means, wherein the specific image is displayed at a first timing (for example, during execution of the first AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 30(c)); There is a case where it is displayed at a second timing after the first timing (for example, during execution of the second AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 30(g)), and the display means When the specific image is displayed at the first timing, the specific image is displayed for a first time (for example, 2.31 s, 1.65 s, 0.99 s), and at the second timing A gaming machine characterized in that, when displaying a specific image, the specific image is displayed over a second period of time (for example, 33 ms), and the second period of time is shorter than the first period of time. be.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the specific image is redisplayed, the specific image is displayed in a second time period shorter than the first time period (for example, the specific image is displayed without animation). By displaying the image, it is possible to reduce the annoyance given to the player and prevent the player from losing their desire to play.

Further, sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 272 and 277) is provided, and when the specific image is displayed at the first timing, the sound output means is at least one of the first times. When a specific sound (for example, sound effect BS) is output during the second period and the specific image is displayed without animation at the second timing, the specific sound may not be output.

With such a configuration, by not outputting the specific sound when the specific image is displayed without animation, it is possible to reduce the annoyance given to the player and prevent the loss of motivation to play. .

In addition, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate, and a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels can be performed. Possible plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 4) for stopping the plurality of reels based on the stop operation ), internal winning result determination means for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information (e.g. internal winning combination lottery processing shown in FIG. 4), and game state control means for controlling the game state (e.g. game state control processing shown), wherein the game state includes an AT state that notifies an operation mode based on the result of the internal winning, and the first timing suggests ending the AT state. is a certain timing in the display period of the end image (for example, during execution of the first AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 30(c)), and the second timing suggests ending the AT state. It may be at a certain timing during the display period of the end image (for example, during execution of the second AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 30(g)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce annoyance given to the player at the end of the AT state, and to prevent a decline in motivation to play.

<Game system>
Next, the gaming system 10 according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the gaming system 10 according to this embodiment.

The gaming system 10 includes a management computer (external server) 30 that controls the entire system, and a plurality of mobile terminal devices 70 (for example, smart phones, mobile phones, etc.) that are communicatively connected to the management computer 30 via a network WNW. , tablet terminals, etc.), an in-store PC 40, and a plurality of gaming machines 50 (e.g., pachinko machines 50a, slot machines 50b) connected to the in-store PC 40 via a network LNW so as to be able to communicate with each other. It is

The network LNW is typically a wired LAN (Local Area Network), but the form of communication may be either wired or wireless, as long as each device can communicate with each other. In addition, the network WNW is typically a wireless LAN (Local Area Network), but the form of communication may be a line that enables mutual communication between devices regardless of the form of communication, whether wired or wireless.

The in-store PC 40 is installed outside the amusement arcade (for example, in a facility managed by the game machine manufacturer) and connected to the game machines 50 (pachinko machine 50a, slot machine 50b) so as to be able to communicate with each other via the network WNW. may

The management computer 30 is a terminal for controlling the entire game system, and conventionally known server machines and personal computers can be applied. The storage means (for example, HDD, DVD, etc.) of the management computer 30 stores operation information transmitted from the in-store PC 40, game information transmitted from the portable terminal device 70, and the like.

Here, the "operation information" is information relating to the operation of the gaming machine 50 (pachinko machine 50a, slot machine 50b), for example, gaming machine identification information (ID given to the gaming machine, model of the gaming machine , manufacturer name), inter-machine identification information (ID given to inter-machine), game machine island identification information (ID given to game machine island), machine number, game start time, game end time, cumulative input Information such as the number of coins, the accumulated payout number, the number of times of bonuses, the number of times of big wins and small wins, etc., corresponds to this information.

This operation information is output to the in-store PC 40 via the network LNW such as island facilities installed in the game arcade, and is collected and managed by the management computer 30 via the network WNW.

The "game information" is information related to games, and includes, for example, the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, the number of times each effect was executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information (regarding a certain mission that has already been achieved). information), custom character release information (information on released characters), and the like.

A player reads a two-dimensional code (details will be described later) displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) of the gaming table 50 with a device capable of reading the two-dimensional code (mobile terminal device 70 in this example). By reading and acquiring URL information (access information) and accessing a specific mobile site (in this example, a website managed by the management computer 30 (external server)) based on the acquired URL information, this It is possible to transmit and record game information to the mobile site, and the mobile site stores the game information and personal information (login password, etc.) in association with the two-dimensional code.

In addition, the player can log in to the gaming system 10 by entering the login password acquired from the mobile site into the gaming machine 50, and by entering the login state, the game associated with the two-dimensional code can be played. Information can be acquired from the mobile site and reflected on the gaming machine 50 .

<Game system / two-dimensional code>
Next, the "two-dimensional code" according to the present invention will be explained.

The "two-dimensional code" according to the present invention refers to a code that can hold information in the horizontal and vertical directions, as opposed to a one-dimensional code (barcode) that holds information only in the horizontal direction. It can be roughly divided into two types: a "stack type two-dimensional code" in which the code is stacked and a "matrix type two-dimensional code" in the form of a checkerboard.

Typical examples of stacked two-dimensional codes include PDF417, CODE49, etc. Typical examples of matrix-type two-dimensional codes include QR code (registered trademark), DataMatrix (registered trademark) code, VeriCode (registered trademark). ), color code (registered trademark), SP code, three-dimensional code, and the like.

The QR code further includes a design QR in which an arbitrary illustration or the like can be drawn on the pattern of the code. There is a pattern that expresses an arbitrary illustration.

The slot machine according to this example includes access information (eg, URL information) for accessing an external server (eg, management computer 30), game information related to games (eg, the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, 2D code generation means for generating a 2D code (for example, QR code) based on generation information including the number of times each performance was executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc.) , the two-dimensional code can be displayed based on the operation by operating means (for example, the cross key 191a or the OK button 191b of the information display button 191).

<Game system/login operation>
Next, the login operation of the gaming system 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32(a) to 32(f). 32(a) to 32(f) are diagrams showing the flow up to login of the gaming system 10 in chronological order.

The player can log in to the gaming system 10 by entering the login password obtained from the mobile site into the gaming machine 50 . Here, an example of logging into the gaming system 10 by entering a login password into the slot machine 50b will be described.

32(a) and 32(b) are triggered by the passage of a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) in a certain gaming state (eg, non-gaming state), and the menu is displayed by pressing the production button 192. This is a state in which guidance display (in this example, display of a character string "display menu by pressing button") for notifying that display is possible has started.

4C shows a state in which the effect button 192 is pressed (button pressed) in the state where the guidance display shown in FIG.

The menu screen of this example is composed of a submenu display area arranged on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 and an explanation display area arranged on the right side of the display area.

In the submenu display area of the menu screen, there are multiple types of submenus (in this example, "Character Select", "Volume/Luminance Adjustment", "Login", "Quick Start", "Progress", "Record"). "Exit" and "Back") are displayed. The player temporarily selects (selects) a desired submenu with the cross key 191a of the information display button 191, and then presses (determines) the OK button 191b of the information display button 191 to enter the submenu. It is possible to perform the corresponding functions.

An explanation display corresponding to the submenu provisionally selected by the cross key 191a is displayed in the explanation display area of the menu screen. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(c), when the selection operation of the submenu "character select" is performed, an explanatory display saying "You can select your favorite character" is displayed, and the , when the user selects the sub-menu 'login', an explanation message 'You can log in using the password obtained from the mobile site' is displayed.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 4(h), when the sub-menu "In progress" is selected, an explanatory display saying "You can view the progress of the game on the mobile site" is displayed. As shown in 33(c), when the sub-menu ``record and end'' is selected, an explanation message ``you can issue a two-dimensional code for ending the game'' is displayed.

It should be noted that a submenu that is displayed in the dark in the menu indicates that it cannot be selected by a selection operation. For example, since the state shown in FIG. 32(c) is before login to the gaming system 10, the sub-menu "progress" and the sub-menu "record and finish" are displayed in black, and can be selected by a selection operation. Can not.

In addition, since the state shown in FIG. 4G is that the game system 10 is being logged in, the submenu "login" is displayed in a dark state and cannot be selected by a selection operation. It should be noted that the game system 10 may be configured so that another player can log in even while the game system 10 is logged in. In this case, the submenu "login" is not displayed in the dark.

The state shown in FIG. 32(d) is the state in which the sub-menu "login" has been selected, and the state shown in FIG. 32(e) is the state in which the sub-menu "login" has been selected. be.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(d), since the operation of selecting the sub-menu "login" has been performed, an explanation "You can log in using the password obtained from the mobile site" is displayed in the explanation display area. is displayed.

In the subsequent state shown in (e) of the same figure, the login password entry screen is displayed because the decision operation of the submenu "login" has been performed. On this login password input screen, the player uses the cross key 191a and the OK button 191b to enter the login password obtained from the mobile site, and then presses the "determine" button using the OK button 191b to log in. Perform the decision operation to confirm the password. Then, when the entered login password is valid, it becomes possible to log in to the gaming system 10 .

When the login password input by operating the cross key 191a or the OK button 191b (operation of the operating means) is valid, the management computer 30 of the gaming system 10 sets the gaming system 10 to the login state and allows the player to enter the password. starts collecting and updating the game information of the gaming machine 50 corresponding to the login password entered by the player, and stores the updated game information in association with the login password entered by the player.

In addition, when the login state is entered, as shown in FIG. 32(f), a level display (in this example, a character string “Lv. A meter display showing the progress of the level) is displayed. The game level of the player is a numerical value that increases as a result of completing a mission, reaching a specified number of games, or the like.

<Game System / Intermediate Progress Viewing>
Next, referring to FIG. 32(f) to FIG. 32(k), intermediate progress viewing of the gaming system 10 will be described. FIG. 32(f) to FIG. 32(k) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from after login in the gaming system 10 to viewing the progress.

By logging into the gaming system 10, the player can issue (generate) an in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) for checking the progress of the game on the gaming machine 50. be. Here, an example of issuing a two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) during play in the slot machine 50b will be described.

FIG. 32(g) shows that a menu display operation (for example, pressing the OK button 191b) is performed in a game state (for example, normal game state) shown in FIG. state.

Since this state is the login state of the gaming system 10, in this state, the submenu "login" is displayed in the dark and cannot be selected by a selection operation, but the other submenus can be selected.

In addition, in the same state, as the selection operation of the default (initial setting), the selection operation of the submenu "Character Select" is performed, so in the explanation display area of the menu screen, "You can select your favorite character". is displayed.

<Game system/Browse progress/Display 2D code during game>
The state shown in FIG. 32(h) is the state in which the sub-menu "progress" has been selected, and the state shown in FIG. 32(i) is the sub-menu "in progress" has been determined. state.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(h), since the selection operation of the sub-menu "progress" has been performed, the explanation display "You can view the progress of the game on the mobile site" is displayed in the explanation display area. ing.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 11(i), since the decision operation (second operation) of the sub-menu "progress" has been performed, the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 and this An end button EB for erasing the display of the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2, and an explanation display of this in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 (in this example, " Please read the two-dimensional code on the terminal and view the progress of the game on the mobile site") is displayed.

The player reads the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 displayed on the display device (liquid crystal display device 157 in this example) of the slot machine 50b with the portable terminal device 70 or the like, and obtains the URL information. and accessing a specific mobile site (website managed by the management computer 30) based on the acquired URL information, it is possible to acquire (download) the progress from this mobile site. .

Here, in the "intermediate progress" that can be acquired by the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) during the game, at least part of the information of the "game information" (in this example, the number of games played, each winning combination number of times). The information included in the "progress" is not limited to this example, and may be the same as the game information.

The slot machine according to the present example can display a second two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code CD2 during play) based on a second operation (for example, a decision operation by the OK button 191b) by the operation means, When displaying the second two-dimensional code (second case), while maintaining the login state, before displaying the second two-dimensional code, the first confirmation display (for example, "two-dimensional code Is it OK to display?") is configured not to be displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(i), the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 is displayed based on the decision operation by the OK button 191b, but the in-game two-dimensional code (second Even if the two-dimensional code) CD2 is displayed (issued), the login state of the gaming system 10 does not change to the logout state (the login state is maintained). Before displaying, a display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) for confirming whether or not to start displaying the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2. Is it okay to show the code?") is not displayed.

According to this example, when the two-dimensional code (in this example, the two-dimensional code during game play) is displayed, there is no need to operate the first confirmation display (in this example, display start confirmation display). It is possible to eliminate the inequality and improve the convenience of the player.

<Game System/Browse Progress/Erase Display of 2D Code During Game>
The state shown in FIG. 32(j) is the state in which the confirmation display of the end of display of the in-game two-dimensional code CD2 has started, and the state shown in FIG. This is a state in which a Yes determination operation has been performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a second two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code during play) is displayed, an erasing operation (for example, an end decision operation by the end button EB) is performed by the operating means. , to display a second confirmation display (for example, a display end confirmation display) for the second two-dimensional code.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(j), in the state where the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 shown in FIG. Since the deletion operation) has been performed, a display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 for confirming whether or not the display of the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 can be ended is displayed.

In this display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2, a character string "Do you want to end the display of the two-dimensional code?" and a No button for continuing the display of the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before the two-dimensional code is read, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

In addition, the "second confirmation display" according to the present invention is not limited to this example as long as it is a display related to the two-dimensional code. Therefore, for example, the display mode of the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 for confirming whether or not the display of the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 can be ended, and the end-time two-dimensional code described later. (First two-dimensional code) A display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC1 for confirming whether or not the display of CD1 can be ended may be different.

Therefore, for example, in the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 without logout, a character string "Is it OK to end the display of the two-dimensional code?" In the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC1, a character string "Is it OK to end the display of the two-dimensional code when I am logged out?" may be displayed.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(k), the Yes button is pressed to select Yes while the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 shown in FIG. 4(j) is being displayed. , After the display of the menu including the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 is terminated (deleted), the game state before displaying the menu (this example Then, it returns to the normal game state).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32(j), an end decision operation (erasing operation by the operating means) is performed by the end button EB, and a display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 is displayed. If so, the Yes button is displayed in a selected state. However, it may be displayed with the No button selected instead of the Yes button selected.

By doing so, it is possible to further prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before the two-dimensional code is read, thereby enhancing convenience for the player. Specifically, when the Yes button is displayed in a selected state, if the decision operation by the OK button 191b is performed twice in a row (when an erroneous operation is performed twice in a row) ), the two-dimensional code will be erased, but if it is displayed with the No button selected, if the decision operation with the OK button 191b is performed twice consecutively (two consecutive times ), the two-dimensional code will not be erased.

<End game system/game record>
Next, the end of the game record of the game system 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33(a) to 33(h). FIGS. 33(a) to 33(h) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from after login to the end of game recording in the gaming system 10. As shown in FIG.

By logging into the gaming system 10, the player can issue (generate) an end time two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) for recording gaming information and logging out at the gaming machine 50. is. Here, an example of issuing a two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) at the end of the slot machine 50b will be described.

FIG. 33(b) shows a state in which the presentation button 192 is pressed (button pressed) in the state where the guidance display shown in FIG.

In this state, since the gaming system 10 is being logged in, the submenu "login" is displayed in the dark and cannot be selected by a selection operation, but the other submenus can be selected.

In addition, in the same state, as the selection operation of the default (initial setting), the selection operation of the submenu "Character Select" is performed, so in the explanation display area of the menu screen, "You can select your favorite character". is displayed.

<Game system / end of game record / display of two-dimensional code at end>
The state shown in FIG. 33(c) is a state in which the sub-menu ``record and end'' is selected, and the state shown in FIG. has been performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(c), since the selection operation of the sub-menu "record and end" has been performed, the explanation "you can issue a two-dimensional code for ending the game" is displayed in the explanation display area. showing the display.

The slot machine according to this example can display a first two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code at the end) based on a first operation (for example, a decision operation by the OK button 191b) by the operation means, When displaying one two-dimensional code (first case), the login state is set to the logout state, and before displaying the first two-dimensional code, a first confirmation display regarding the two-dimensional code (for example, a display start confirmation display) is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 33(d), the decision operation (first operation) of the sub-menu "record and end" has been performed, so the end two-dimensional code (first operation) shown in FIG. 33(e) Before displaying the two-dimensional code) CD1, a display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) RC1 for confirming whether or not to start displaying the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the end is displayed. .

In this display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) RC1, a character string "Do you want to start displaying the two-dimensional code?" and a No button to be selected when ending the display of the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code (in this example, the two-dimensional code at the end of the game) from being displayed due to the player's erroneous operation, etc., thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

Also, if the two-dimensional code (in this example, the two-dimensional code at the time of termination) is displayed due to an erroneous operation, etc., the user will be logged out, and it will be necessary to log in again, which is troublesome. According to this, when the two-dimensional code is displayed, by displaying the first confirmation display before displaying the two-dimensional code, it is possible to prevent the player from being logged out due to an erroneous operation, etc., and improve the convenience of the player. .

In addition, the "first confirmation display" according to the present invention is not limited to this example as long as it is a display related to the two-dimensional code. Therefore, for example, a confirmation display for confirming that the gaming system 10 changes from the login state to the logout state by displaying the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the end (for example, "When the two-dimensional code is displayed, the login information is erased, but is it okay to display it?” may be displayed).

In the state shown in FIG. 33(e), while the display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) RC1 shown in FIG. End time two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1, end button EB for erasing display of this end time two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1, end time two-dimensional code ( First two-dimensional code) CD1 explanation display (in this example, the character string "Please read the two-dimensional code with the terminal and save the game record on the mobile site") is displayed.

The player reads the termination time two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 displayed on the display device (liquid crystal display device 157 in this example) of the slot machine 50b with the portable terminal device 70 or the like, and obtains the URL information. is acquired, and based on the acquired URL information, a specific mobile site (website managed by the management computer 30) is accessed. It is possible to save the number of winnings, the number of executions of each effect, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, and other game-related information).

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 4(e), since the end time two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 is displayed, the gaming system 10 changes from the login state to the logout state.

<Game system/end of game record/clear display of two-dimensional code at end>
The state shown in FIG. 33(f) is the state in which the display end confirmation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end is started, and the state shown in FIG. 33(g) is the display end confirmation display shown in FIG. It is a state in which a Yes determination operation (or a game start operation) has been performed.

When the slot machine according to this example displays a first two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code at the time of termination), an erasing operation (for example, an end decision operation by the end button EB) is performed by the operating means. , a first confirmation display (for example, display end confirmation display).

In the state shown in FIG. 33(f), in the state where the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the end shown in FIG. erasing operation) has been performed, a display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 for confirming whether or not the display of the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 can be ended is displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before the two-dimensional code is read, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

Also, if the 2D code is erased due to an erroneous operation before it is read, the user will be logged out and it will be impossible to read (redisplay) the 2D code. , According to this example, by displaying a display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 for confirming whether or not to end the display of the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the end, the two-dimensional code It is possible to prevent erasing due to an erroneous operation or the like before reading the , and the convenience for the player can be improved.

On the other hand, when the start lever 135 is operated to start the game while the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 is displayed as shown in FIG. (Second confirmation display) The display of the menu including the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the time of termination is ended without displaying RC2, and the game state before displaying the menu (in this example, return to the normal game state).

According to this example, by performing the game start operation, the game can be progressed without displaying the second confirmation display (in this example, the display end confirmation display RC2). It can increase the satisfaction of the person.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(g), in the state where the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 shown in FIG. game start operation) has been performed, the display of the menu including the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the end is ended, and the game state before displaying the menu (in this example, normal game state).

The state shown in FIG. 33(h) is a game state (in this example, normal game state) shown in FIG. has started to be displayed.

Since this state is a logout state of the gaming system 10, in this state, the sub-menu "in progress" and the sub-menu "record and finish" are displayed in the dark, and neither can be selected by selection operation. but other submenus are selectable, including "login".

In addition, in the same state, as the selection operation of the default (initial setting), the selection operation of the submenu "Character Select" is performed, so in the explanation display area of the menu screen, "You can select your favorite character". is displayed.

<Game system/Browse progress, End game record/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) and operation means (for example, the cross key 191a and the OK button 191b). etc.), access information (for example, URL information) for accessing an external server (for example, the management computer 30 shown in FIG. 31), game information related to the game (for example, the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, a two-dimensional code generation means for generating a two-dimensional code based on generation information including the number of times each effect has been executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc.), When the display means displays a two-dimensional code (for example, an end time two-dimensional code CD1 shown in FIG. 33(e)) based on a first operation (for example, a decision operation by the OK button 191b) by the operation means (Hereinafter referred to as "first case"), before displaying the two-dimensional code, a first confirmation display (for example, a display start confirmation display RC1 shown in FIG. 33(d)) is displayed. is displayed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being displayed due to an erroneous operation by the player, etc., thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

In addition, the display means displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a playing two-dimensional code CD2 shown in FIG. 32(i)) based on a second operation (for example, a decision operation by the OK button 191b) by the operation means. When it does (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the first confirmation display may not be displayed before displaying the two-dimensional code.

With such a configuration, when the two-dimensional code is displayed, it is not necessary to operate the first confirmation display.

Further, the operation means is capable of inputting a password (for example, a login password), and includes state management means for setting a login state when the password input by the operation of the operation means is valid, and The management means may set the logged-in state to the logged-out state in the first case, while maintaining the logged-in state in the second case.

If the two-dimensional code is displayed due to an erroneous operation, etc., the user will be logged out, and it will be necessary to log in again, which is an annoyance. , by displaying the first confirmation display before the display, it is possible to prevent a logout state due to an erroneous operation or the like, and improve convenience for the player.

Further, the operation means is capable of an erasing operation for erasing the display of the two-dimensional code (for example, an end decision operation by the end button EB shown in FIGS. 32(i) and 33(e)), and the display The means displays a second confirmation display regarding the two-dimensional code (for example, a display end confirmation display RC2 shown in FIG. 33(f)) when the erasing operation is performed by the operation means in the first case. In the second case, when the erasing operation is performed by the operation means, the second confirmation display (for example, display end confirmation display RC2 shown in FIG. 32(j)) may be displayed. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before the two-dimensional code is read, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

<Issuance of two-dimensional code before achievement display>
Next, the issuance of the two-dimensional code before displaying the achievement will be described.

FIG. 34(a) is a diagram showing an example of two-dimensional code issuance before and after the mission completion display in chronological order.

In FIG. 34(a), the state indicated by symbol T1 is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 (non-login state) and has started M (M is a positive integer) game items.

In this state, the player has not logged into the gaming system 10 (non-login state), so in the M game, character selection by the player is not performed, and the default (initial setting) is the character setting status. (character setting information) and the game progresses.

The state indicated by reference numeral T2 in FIG. 34(a) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1th game.

This state is a state in which the player logs in to the gaming system 10 before the start of the M+1 game and sets the character setting status (character setting information) to old in the character select. ), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a level display indicating the game level of the player (in this example, a character string of "Lv. 25" and a meter indicating the progress of the level are displayed ) is displayed, and in the game after the M+1 game, the game progresses with the old man set as the character in place of the lord.

The state indicated by reference numeral T3 in FIG. 34(a) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1000th game.

The slot machine according to this example can display a mission completion display suggesting that a certain mission has been achieved when a certain mission has been achieved (for example, the number of games played has reached 1000) in the logged-in state. be.

In this example, since the number of games reached 1000 (achieved a certain mission) in the M+1000th game in the login state, in the M+1000th game which is the next game after the number of games reached 1000, FIG. As shown in (a-2), a mission achievement display MP (in this example, "1000 Game accomplished!”) is displayed.

Note that "when a certain mission is accomplished" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. If, when the rare production (for example, production in which the premier character appears) is executed, when a specific continuous production is executed, a specific game (for example, AT game) when transition (plunge), a specific When a game (for example, an AT game) is won, when the value (medal) acquisition amount (number) reaches a certain value, when the points reach a certain numerical value, the game level reaches a certain level case, winning a mini-game, or winning a specific winning combination a certain number of times. Note that the mission completion display is displayed at the start of the next game after the game in which the mission has been achieved.

The state indicated by symbol T4 in FIG. 34(a) is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 after displaying the mission achievement display MP.

In this example, after the number of games has reached 1000 (achieved a certain mission) (after the mission completion display is displayed) and before the start of the M+1002 game, the player selects the submenu "record and end". Since the two-dimensional code was selected and issued (see FIG. 33 for details), as shown in FIG. information) is displayed, and the game system 10 is logged out.

The player acquires the URL information by reading the termination time two-dimensional code CD1 displayed on the display device (liquid crystal display device 157 in this example) of the slot machine 50b with the portable terminal device 70 or the like, and acquires the acquired URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (website managed by the management computer 30) based on It is possible to save game-related information such as the number of executions, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, and custom character release information.

In the M+1002nd game after logout, instead of the old man, the default (initial setting) lord is set in the character setting state (character setting information), and the game progresses.

The state indicated by symbol T4' in FIG. 34(a) is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 before the mission achievement display MP is displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, even before the mission achievement display (for example, the mission achievement display MP shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code (for example, an end time two-dimensional code CD1) can be generated, and the two-dimensional code including mission achievement information can be displayed based on a certain operation by the operating means. .

In this example, before the start of the M+1000th game before the mission achievement display MP is displayed, the player selects the submenu "record and end" to issue the two-dimensional code (see FIG. 33 for details). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34(a-3′), the end time two-dimensional code CD1 including mission achievement information (in this example, information indicating that the number of games has reached 1000) is displayed, You have logged out of the gaming system 10 .

According to this example, a player who does not understand the conditions for mission achievement may end the game by displaying the two-dimensional code even before the mission achievement display is displayed. By displaying a two-dimensional code containing mission achievement information based on a certain operation by , it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Although illustration is omitted, the slot machine according to this example is configured not to display the mission achievement display when the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information is displayed before the mission achievement display is displayed. Therefore, in this example, before the start of the M+1000 game, after displaying the end time two-dimensional code CD1 including the mission achievement information (in this example, information indicating that the number of games has reached 1000), M+1000 Even when the number of games reaches 1000 (a certain mission is achieved) in the game line, the mission achievement display MP shown in FIG. character string) is not displayed.

With such a configuration, when a player ends the game by displaying the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information, the mission achievement information display becomes annoying for the next player. By not displaying , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Issue two-dimensional code before displaying achievement/variation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34(b), a modified example of two-dimensional code issuance before achievement display will be described. FIG. 34(b) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, a modification of the two-dimensional code issuance before the mission completion display.

The state indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 34(b) is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 before the mission achievement display MP2 shown in FIG. 34(b-2) is displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, even before the mission achievement display (for example, the mission achievement display MP2 shown in FIG. information indicating) (for example, a two-dimensional code CD3 at the end shown in FIG. 34(b-1)), and a certain operation by the operation means (for example, a decision operation by the OK button 191b) A two-dimensional code containing mission achievement information can be displayed based on the

The state shown in FIG. 34(b) is before the start of the M+999th game, and before the success of the continuous run-out in the M+1000th game (achieving a certain mission), but the continuous effect is controlled by the control unit. Therefore, it is internally determined that the continuous effect will succeed at the M+1000th game.

For this reason, this state is the state before the success of the continuous play (a certain mission is achieved) and the mission completion display MP2 is displayed. (See FIG. 33 for details). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34(b-1), mission achievement information (in this example, information indicating that a ) is displayed at the end, and the game system 10 is logged out.

According to this example, a player who does not understand the conditions for mission achievement may end the game by displaying the two-dimensional code even before the mission achievement display is displayed. By displaying a two-dimensional code containing mission achievement information based on a certain operation by , it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, even if the mission is not actually accomplished, when the mission achievement is internally determined, the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information is displayed to increase the player's satisfaction. be able to.

In FIG. 34(b), the state indicated by symbol T2 is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and the M+1000th game has started. This is a state in which the M+1001th game has been completed while logged in to .

In the slot machine according to this example, when a certain mission is achieved in a logged-in state (for example, a continuous effect is successful), the certain mission is achieved in the next game after the game in which the certain mission is achieved. A mission accomplished indicator can be displayed suggesting that the mission has been completed.

In this example, in the M+1000th game in the login state, since the continuous effect was successful (a certain mission was achieved), as shown in FIG. (in this example, at the start of the M+1001th game in the logged-in state), a mission achievement display MP2 ( In this example, the display of the character string "Achievement of continuous production success!") is displayed.

In addition, in the M+1000th game, since the number of games has reached 1000 (another certain mission has been achieved), the mission achievement display MP2 (in this example, the characters "Continuous production success achieved!" row display), a mission achievement display MP1 (in this example, "1000 games achieved!") indicating that the number of games has reached 1000 (accomplished another certain mission). character string) is displayed.

Furthermore, the small panda character was released (accomplished another mission based on a certain mission) based on the fact that a specific continuous effect was executed (accomplished a certain mission) in the M+1000th game. , in addition to the mission achievement display MP2 (in this example, the display of the character string "Consecutive production success achievement!"), the small panda character was released (accomplished another mission based on a certain mission ) (in this example, display of a character string “Little panda character released!”) is displayed.

Note that the "mission achievement display" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. As shown in , in the display area of the mission achievement display MP3 (in this example, the display of the character string "Little panda character released!"), the mission achievement display MP1 (in this example, the character string "1000 games achieved!" display) may be displayed.

Further, when displaying a plurality of mission achievement displays, they may be displayed in order in one display region instead of being displayed individually in the plurality of display regions of the liquid crystal display device 157. Similarly, if the small panda character has already been released, the mission completion display MP3 (in this example, the character string “Release the small panda character!”) is not displayed, and the mission completion display MP1 (this In this example, the display of the character string "1000 games achieved!") and the mission achievement display MP2 (in this example, the display of the character string "successfully achieved consecutive effects!") are alternately displayed in one display area. may

<Issuance of two-dimensional code before displaying achievement/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) and operation means (for example, the cross key 191a and the OK button 191b). etc.), access information (for example, URL information) for accessing an external server (for example, the management computer 30 shown in FIG. 31), game information related to the game (for example, the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, a two-dimensional code generation means for generating a two-dimensional code based on generation information including the number of executions of each effect, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc.), , the game information includes mission achievement information regarding a certain mission (for example, information indicating that the number of games has reached 1000), and the display means displays when the certain mission is achieved (for example, the number of games played reaches 1000 times), a mission achievement display (for example, the mission achievement display MP shown in FIG. The code generating means generates the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information (for example, the end two-dimensional code CD1 shown in FIG. 34(a-3′)) even before the mission achievement display is displayed. and wherein the display means can display the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information based on a certain operation by the operation means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a player who does not understand the conditions for mission achievement displays the two-dimensional code and ends the game even before the mission achievement display is displayed. Therefore, by displaying a two-dimensional code including mission achievement information based on a certain operation by the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.
Further, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157), operation means (for example, cross key 191a, OK button 191b, etc.), Access information (e.g., URL information) for accessing an external server (e.g., management computer 30 shown in FIG. 31), game information related to games (e.g., number of games played, number of times each winning combination was won, execution of each effect a two-dimensional code generation means for generating a two-dimensional code based on generation information including the number of times played, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc., wherein the game information includes mission achievement information (for example, information indicating that the number of games has reached 1000) regarding a certain mission, and the display means displays when a certain condition regarding the certain mission is satisfied (for example, the number of games reaches 1000 times), a mission achievement display suggesting that a certain condition has been established in a certain variation game after the next game variation of the variation game in which the certain condition is established (for example, FIG. 34 ( A mission achievement display MP) shown in a-2) can be displayed, and the two-dimensional code generation means generates the two-dimensional code including the certain mission achievement information even before the certain variation game is started. A dimensional code can be generated, and the display means generates the two-dimensional code (for example, , and a two-dimensional code CD1) at the end shown in FIG. 34(a-3').
Further, the display means can display the two-dimensional code based on the second operation by the operation means, and when the two-dimensional code is displayed based on the first operation in the login state, the logout state is displayed. When the two-dimensional code is displayed based on the second operation in the logged-in state, the logged-in state is maintained, and the two-dimensional code displayed based on the second operation includes the or It may not include mission achievement information.

Further, when the display means displays the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information before displaying the mission achievement display, the display means displays the mission achievement display even at the timing of displaying the mission achievement display. It may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, when a player ends the game by displaying the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information, the mission achievement information display becomes annoying for the next player. By not displaying , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, the display means displays the two-dimensional display including the mission achievement information related to the certain mission when it is determined that the certain mission is to be achieved even before the certain mission is achieved. It may be possible to display the code.

With such a configuration, even if the mission is not actually accomplished, when the mission achievement is internally determined, the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information is displayed, thereby enabling the game to be played. It can increase the satisfaction of the person.

<Automatic setting of birthday character>
Next, automatic setting of birthday characters will be described.

In the slot machine according to this example, a corresponding character can be selected on a specific date (in this example, birthday) based on RTC (real time clock) information.

The first sub-control unit 400 has an RTC with a clock/calendar function that measures "year", "month", "day", "day of week", "hour", "minute" and "second". The RTC of this example includes an oscillation circuit section that generates a clock signal based on the oscillation operation of a crystal oscillator of a predetermined (for example, 32.768 kHz) frequency, a register circuit section in which the generated time information is written, and a long battery life. and a backup battery capable of backing up.

<Automatic setting of birthday character / When there is no character corresponding to the birthday>
FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when there is no character corresponding to a birthday during a certain game period.

The slot machine according to the present example includes setting means (for example, custom function) capable of setting character setting information (for example, information on the character's name and costume) regarding the character.

After logging in to the gaming system 10, the player uses the cross key 191a to provisionally select (select) the submenu "Character Select" of the menu described with reference to FIG. It is possible to execute a function (custom function) corresponding to the submenu "character select" by performing a pressing operation (determining operation).

Instead of selecting a character after logging in, character information may be associated with a login password obtained from a mobile site.

In the custom function (setting means) of this example, when the character setting information is initialized (for example, when logged out from the gaming system 10), the character setting information ( For example, it is configured to set the buttocks (clothes A)).

It should be noted that the "first character" according to the present invention is not limited to the lord's character, and may be another character such as an old man. Also, the "character setting information about the character" is not limited to the name of the character or the costume of the character, but may be the aspect of the character (for example, size, color, shape, etc.).

In the custom function (setting means) of this example, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, the character is released), character setting information (for example, Princess (Costume A)) can be set, but if certain conditions are not met (for example, the character has not been released), character setting information regarding the second character cannot be set.

The "second character" according to the present invention is not limited to the princess character, and may be other characters such as an old man or a small panda. Also, the "certain condition" according to the present invention is not limited to the release of the character. However, it may be a condition that a specific winning role (eg, rare role) has been won, or a specific game state (eg, AT game) may be set as a condition, or a certain mission has been achieved. may be a condition.

Further, the slot machine according to the present example includes effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) capable of executing effects, and the effect means produces effects (for example, custom function It is possible to execute a custom character stage in which a character set by appears.

In FIG. 35(a), the state indicated by symbol T1 is a state in which the player has logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started M (M is a positive integer) game items.

In the same state, the player has changed the character from a lord wearing costume A (first character) to a princess wearing costume A (second character) using the custom function. (Character setting information) is changed from Lord (Costume A) to Princess (Costume A).

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not yet been won, in the M-th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless, the production of the castle stage will be executed.

In this example, the custom character stage is configured to be executed only when the custom character stage shift lottery is won. Not limited to this example, for example, if a character is set by a custom function, a custom character stage may be always executed in subsequent games without performing a lottery, or only in a specific game state (for example, normal Only during the game, only during the AT game), a custom character stage may be executed.

The state indicated by reference numeral T2 in FIG. 35(a) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1th game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Princess (Costume A), and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+1 game, FIG. 1), an effect (custom character stage) in which a princess (costume A) appears is executed.

According to this example, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to the character setting information of the player, and to attract the interest of the player, thereby improving the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, the rarity of the second character (the princess character in this example) can be ensured, the second character can be made to feel special, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

The state indicated by reference numeral T3 in FIG. 35(a) is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 before the start of the M+10th game.

In the same state, before the start of the M+10th game, the player selects the sub-menu "record and end" to issue a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 33 for details), so FIG. ), the end two-dimensional code CD1 including the game information is displayed, and the game system 10 is logged out.

Further, the slot machine according to this example includes initialization means capable of initializing character setting information.

In this example, when the player logs out of the gaming system 10, the character setting information is initialized by the initialization means. Changed to costume A).

The conditions for initializing the character setting information are not limited to this example. is performed, the slot machine is reset, the power is turned on after being turned off for a long time, and the like.

In addition, "to initialize the setting information of the character" according to the present invention is not limited to setting the setting information of the character to the setting information of the first character (in this example, the lord (clothes A)). , or other characters such as old man.

The slot machine according to this example includes storage means (for example, RAM) for storing at least date and time information (for example, date and time of birth) of one or more characters, and can generate at least date and time information. time information generating means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)), and the setting means sets a certain period (for example, a day when the player is playing a game) based on the date and time information of the time information generating means. When the character (for example, a princess character) birthday date information is included and the character setting information is initialized (for example, when the player logs out of the gaming system 10 and the character setting information is initialized). character setting information about the character is set.

In FIG. 35(a), the state indicated by symbol T3 is a state in which the character setting information has been initialized by logging out from the gaming system 10. For example, December 25) does not include the date and time information of a certain character's birthday (because there is no character whose birthday is December 25), the character setting information is default (initial setting ) is set to the buto (Costume A).

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not yet been won, in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless, the production of the castle stage will be executed.

The state indicated by reference numeral T4 in FIG. 35(a) is a state in which the player has not logged into the gaming system 10 and the M+11th game has started.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Lord (Costume A), and the custom character stage transition lottery has been won. As shown in 3), an effect (custom character stage) in which Tono (costume A) appears is executed.

<Automatic setting of birthday character/when princess character is birthday>
FIG. 35(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when the birthday of a princess character is included in a certain game period.

35(b), the state indicated by symbol T1 is a state in which the player has logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started M (M is a positive integer) game items.

In this state, the player uses the custom function to change the character from the default (initial setting) lord (first character) (clothes A) to old man (second character) (clothes A). Therefore, the character setting status (character setting information) is changed from the lord (clothes A) to the old man (clothes A).

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not yet been won, in the M-th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless, the production of the castle stage will be executed.

The state indicated by reference numeral T2 in FIG. 35(b) is a state in which the player has logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1th game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Grandpa (Costume A), and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+1 game, FIG. , an effect (custom character stage) in which an old man (costume A) appears is executed.

According to this example, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to the character setting information of the player, and to attract the interest of the player, thereby improving the operation rate of the gaming machine.

The state indicated by symbol T3 in FIG. 35(b) is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 before the start of the M+10th game.

In the same state, before the start of the M+10th game, the player selects the sub-menu "record and finish" to issue a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 33 for details), so FIG. ), the end two-dimensional code CD1 including the game information is displayed, and the game system 10 is logged out.

In this state, the character setting information is initialized by logging out from the gaming system 10, and in this example, on the day when the player is playing the game (a certain period, for example, December 25), Since the date and time information of the character's (certain character's) birthday (December 25th in this example) is included, the character setting information is set to Princess (costume S). Note that the costume S (special costume) is information that can be set in the character setting information only when the princess is on her birthday.

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not yet been won, in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless, the production of the castle stage will be executed.

The state indicated by reference numeral T4 in FIG. 35(b) is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 and the M+11th game has started.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Princess (costume S), and the custom character stage transition lottery has been won. 3), an effect (custom character stage) in which a princess (costume S) appears is executed.

According to this example, the rarity of the second character (in this example, the character of the princess) can be ensured, the second character can be made to feel special, and an unexpected effect can be achieved. can be provided, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

The character that appears in the custom character stage is not limited to this example, and for example, a setting suggesting character that suggests setting values may appear. In this case, for example, when winning a lottery as to whether or not setting suggestion is performed and making a setting suggestion character appear, it is preferable to make the setting suggestion character appear even when a custom character is set by a custom function. In addition, even if a custom character is not set by the custom function and a character corresponding to the birthday is to appear, it is preferable to preferentially appear the setting-suggested character.

<Automatic setting of birthday character/when your character is your birthday>
FIG. 36(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when the birthday of the character of the lord is included in a certain game period.

Since the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. 36A are the same as the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. explain.

In FIG. 36(a), the state indicated by symbol T3 is the day (or For example, June 6) includes the date and time information of the birthday (in this example, June 6) of your character (a certain character), so the character setting status (character setting information) is set to the buttocks (clothes S). Note that the costume S (special costume) is information that can be set in the character setting information only when it is your birthday.

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not yet been won, in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless, the production of the castle stage will be executed.

The state indicated by reference numeral T4 in FIG. 36(a) is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 and the M+11th game has started.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Lord (Costume S) and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+11th game, FIG. As shown in 3), an effect (custom character stage) in which Tono (costume S) appears is executed.

According to this example, since an effect (custom character stage) in which Tono (costume S) appears is executed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect and enhance the playability.

<Automatic setting of birthday character/unreleased character is birthday>
FIG. 36(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in chronological order when the birthday of an unreleased character is included in a certain game period.

Since the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. 36(b) are the same as the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. explain.

In FIG. 36(b), the state indicated by symbol T3 is the day (or For example, March 3rd) includes the date and time information of the birthday of the small panda character (some character) (March 3rd in this example), but the small panda character is not yet released. Since it is a character that has not been released (unreleased character), the character setting situation (character setting information) is set to the default (initial setting) lord (clothes A). If the small panda character is not released, the small panda character cannot be selected even during login.

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not yet been won, in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless, the production of the castle stage will be executed.

The state indicated by reference numeral T4 in FIG. 36(b) is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 and the M+11th game has started.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Lord (Costume A), and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+11 game, FIG. As shown in 3), an effect (custom character stage) in which Tono (costume A) appears is executed.

According to this example, since an effect (custom character stage) in which an unreleased character appears is not executed, it is possible to secure the rarity of the unreleased character and make the unreleased character feel special. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

Note that here, birthdays have been described as an example of a period in which a character in a special costume or a special character can be selected, but the "special date and time information" according to the present invention is not limited to birthdays. For example, several days before and after a birthday may be used, Monday may be the first character, Tuesday may be the second character, January may be the first character, and February may be the second character. You can do it.

<Automatic setting of birthday characters/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes setting means (for example, , custom function), initialization means capable of initializing the setting information of the character, and production means capable of executing production (for example, liquid crystal display device 157), The production means is capable of executing production according to the character setting information set by the setting means (for example, a custom character stage in which a character set by a custom function appears), and the character is a first character. A gaming machine comprising a character (for example, a character of Tono), wherein the setting means sets character setting information about the first character when the character setting information is initialized.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide an effect according to the character setting information of the player, and by attracting the interest of the player, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the amusement machine.

Also, the character includes a second character (for example, a princess character), and the setting means, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when the character is released), Character setting information about the character can be set, and the setting means disables setting of the character setting information about the second character when the certain condition is not satisfied (for example, when the character is not released). It may be possible.

With such a configuration, the rarity of the second character can be ensured, the second character can be made to feel special, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

a storage means (eg, RAM) for storing at least special date and time information (eg, date of birth and time of birth, first character for Monday, second character for Tuesday) corresponding to one or more of the characters; and a time information generation means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) capable of generating at least date and time information, wherein the setting means is configured so that the date and time information of the time information generation means corresponds to the special character corresponding to a certain character. In the case where the period is included in the date and time information and the character setting information is initialized, the character setting information relating to the certain character may be set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect and enhance the game playability.

Further, the setting means, when the certain condition is satisfied, sets the special date and time information (for example, date of birth and time of birth) corresponding to the second character in the date and time information of the time information generating means ) and the character setting information is initialized, the character setting information relating to the second character is set, and the setting means sets the certain condition to and the date and time information of the time information generating means is a period included in the special date and time information corresponding to the second character, and the character setting information is initialized. In this state, the character setting information related to the first character may be set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the rarity of the second character, to make the second character feel special, and to provide an unexpected performance, thereby improving the game performance. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

<Counting notification and warning notification>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, counting notification and alert notification will be described.

<Counting notification and alerting notification / old voice (custom voice)>
FIG. 37(a) is a diagram showing an example of count notification and caution alert notification by old voice (custom voice).

In FIG. 37(a), the state indicated by symbol T1 is a state in which the player is logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started M (M is a positive integer) game items. The state indicated by reference symbol T2 is a state in which the player is logged into the gaming system 10 and the M+100th game has started.

The slot machine according to the present example includes setting means (for example, custom function) capable of setting counting notification setting information (for example, counting notification setting information in which the voice for counting notification is the voice of an old man's character (old man's voice)). ).

After logging in to the gaming system 10, the player uses the cross key 191a to provisionally select (select) the submenu "Character Select" of the menu described with reference to FIG. It is possible to execute a function (custom function) corresponding to the submenu "character select" by performing a pressing operation (determining operation).

In the state indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 37(a), after logging into the gaming system 10, the character setting information is set to Grandpa by the custom function (setting means). Count notification setting information (count notification setting information related to count notification) is set for the voice of the character (old man's voice).

Here, the item "character setting situation 1" in FIG. Of the setting information, character information that is applied only to count notification is shown. In the state indicated by reference numeral T1 in FIG. 37(a), character setting status 1 (other than counting notification) and character setting status 2 (counting notification) are both set to old.

In addition, the slot machine according to the present example performs counting processing including processing for updating the number of game values (for example, the number of medals acquired) (for example, information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control unit is sent to the lending machine). processing to transmit), and a notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277) capable of executing count notification related to counting processing, In the logged-in state, it is possible to execute count notification according to the count notification setting information set by the setting means (for example, count notification by voice of an old man character (old man voice)).

For example, during the game period from the Mth game to the M+100th game, when the player performs a counting operation using the operation means (for example, a counting button not shown), the number of acquired medals (number of game values) is updated. In addition to executing the counting process including the process of counting, a counting process display indicating that the counting process is in progress (for example, a character string "counting ..." as shown in FIG. 37 (a-1) display).

In addition, in the game period from the Mth game to the M+100th game, counting notification setting information (counting notification setting information related to counting notification) is performed in which the voice of the counting notification is the voice of the character of the old man (old man voice). Then, counting notification (counting notification according to counting notification setting information) is executed by the voice of the old man character (old man voice).

In the counting notification of this example, when the counting process is completed, the counting notification (for example, "counting output of a voice saying "Completed").

Note that the notification content of the "counting notification" according to the present invention is not limited to the counting notification that the counting process has been completed. It may be an output of a voice saying "Let's start"), or a counting notification that notifies that the gaming system 10 will be in a logout state along with the counting process (for example, "You will be in a logout state after counting is completed"). It may be a voice output) or may be a count notification (for example, a voice output saying "Error occurred. Call a clerk") to notify that an error has occurred in the counting process.

In addition, the notification mode of the "counting notification" according to the present invention is not limited to the sound by the sound output means, and instead of (or in addition to) the sound, display by display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157) may

When the count notification is performed by display by the display means, for example, it may be a count notification (for example, display of a character image of an old man and a line saying "counting is completed") for notifying that the counting process is completed. , counting notification (for example, display of a character image of an old man and a line saying "Start counting") to notify the start of the counting process, or the game system 10 logs out along with the counting process. It may be a count notification (for example, display of a character image of an old man and a line saying "You will be logged out after counting is completed") to notify that an error has occurred in the counting process. It may be a count notification (for example, display of a character image of an old man and a line saying "An error has occurred. Call the clerk").

In FIG. 37(a), the state indicated by symbol T3 is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 (non-login state) and the M+101th game has started.

In the slot machine according to the present example, when the login state is set to the logout state, the count notification setting information (for example, the count notification setting information in which the count notification voice is the voice of an old man character (old man voice)) is initialized. The notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277) is kept until a certain condition is established even in the logout state (for example, at least one game is executed after being set to the logout state). ), it is possible to execute count notification according to the count notification setting information set by the setting means in the logged-in state (for example, count notification by the voice of an old man character (old man voice)).

In FIG. 37(a), the state indicated by symbol T3 is a state in which the gaming system 10 is logged out (non-login state). Therefore, count notification setting information for setting the voice of the count notification to be the voice of an old man's character (old man's voice). is initialized, and in this example, the count notification setting information is set so that the count notification voice is the voice of the default (initial setting) Tono character (Torrent voice).

However, in this example, even in the logout state, until at least one game is executed after being set in the logout state (until a certain condition is satisfied), the count notification set by the setting means in the login state It is possible to execute counting notification according to the setting information (in this example, counting notification by the voice of an old man character (old man voice)). As a result, in the state indicated by symbol T3 in FIG. 37(a), the character setting state 1 (other than the count report) is set to Mr., while the character setting state 2 (count report) is set to the old man. remain.

Therefore, when the user logs out of the gaming system 10 while the counting operation is being performed by the operating means (counting button) (or when the counting operation is performed by the operating means (counting button) immediately after logging out of the gaming system 10). ) executes a counting process including a process of updating the number of won medals (number of game values), and as shown in FIG. Display a processing indication (for example, display of a character string "Counting...").

In addition, in the login state before the start of the M+101 game, counting notification setting information (counting notification setting information related to counting notification) was performed in which the voice for counting notification was the voice of the old man's character (old man's voice). Even so, until at least one game is executed (until a certain condition is met) after being set to the logout state, according to the character setting situation 2 (counting notification), the voice of the old man character (old man voice) Execute counting notification (counting notification according to counting notification setting information).

In the counting notification of this example, when the counting process is completed, as shown in FIG. Count notification (in this example, output of voice saying "counting completed") is performed to notify that the counting has been completed.

According to this example, since it is possible to execute the count notification according to the count notification setting information set by the player, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game and to improve the convenience of the player. can be done.

In addition, since there are a certain number of players who count the number of game values after logging out, even in the logout state, until a certain condition is satisfied, the counting notification setting information set in the login state is not performed. By enabling the execution of the count notification, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction and convenience.

In addition, the slot machine according to the present example, when executing count notification according to the count notification setting information (eg, count notification by the voice of the character of the old man (old man voice)), reports on the game information (for example, the voice of the old man). If a certain condition is satisfied (when a specified number of games or more have been played since the game was set to the login state), or (for example, notification regarding game information).

In the login state before the start of the M+101 game, games have been played for a specified number of games or more (in this example, 100 games or more) since the login state was set (a certain condition is satisfied). When executing counting notification (counting notification according to counting notification setting information) by the character's voice (old man's voice), alerting notification (notification regarding game information) is executed.

In this example, when the counting process is completed, the counting process is started with the voice of the old man's character (old man's voice) from the speakers 272 and 277 as shown in FIG. 37(a-2). Counting notification to notify completion (in this example, output of voice saying "counting completed") followed by warning notification regarding two-dimensional code (in this example, "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code ” output).

According to this example, by making the player pay attention to the game information-related information together with the count notification, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to take the game information (forgetting to record the game information). can enhance sexuality.

Note that the notification content of the "certain notification" according to the present invention is not limited to the alert notification regarding the two-dimensional code, for example, the alert regarding the prepaid card (for example, "Be careful not to forget to remove the card"). It may be an output of a voice saying, "An error has occurred. Call a clerk." Also, it may be an alert irrelevant to the game information (for example, output of voice saying "Don't forget anything" or "Take your card home").

In addition, it is not limited to "notification according to counting notification setting information", that is, "notification corresponding to a character set by a custom function". Even in the case of executing the count notification for informing that it has been done, the attention-calling notification may be executed with the voice of the character of Tono (tono's voice) different from the count notification.

In addition, the notification mode of the "certain notification" according to the present invention is not limited to the sound by the sound output means. you can go

In the case where the count notification is performed by display by the display means, for example, it may be a warning notification regarding the two-dimensional code (for example, display of a character image of an old man and a line saying "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code"). However, it may be a warning about a prepaid card (for example, a character image of an old man and a line saying "Be careful not to forget to take the card"), or a warning about an error (for example, a character of the old man) It may be a display of an image and the words "An error has occurred. Call the clerk").

In addition, the "certain condition" according to the present invention is not limited to the fact that a specified number of games or more have been played after being set to the logged-in state. Alternatively, the prescribed number of games may be a number of games other than 100 games, or may be a condition that is satisfied when the player is logged in.

In addition, in a gaming machine where game information can be collected and saved even when the system corresponding to the gaming system 10 of this embodiment is not logged in (non-login state), the player can select the submenu "Character Select may be a condition that is satisfied when a menu corresponding to "" is selected and opened at least once.

Although illustration is omitted, when staying in the custom character stage in the state indicated by symbol T3 in FIG. ), the production (custom character stage) in which Tono appears is executed.

According to this example, the character appearing in the presentation other than the count notification can be made different from the character in the count notification, thereby making it possible to perform novel performances that have never existed before.

In FIG. 37(a), the state indicated by reference numeral T4 is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 (non-login state) and the M+102nd game has started.

Since this state is the state after at least one game has been played (a certain condition has been met) after being set to the logout state, the count notification voice is the voice of the old man's character (old man's voice). The counting notification setting information (counting notification setting information related to counting notification) becomes invalid, and the counting notification setting information (counting notification setting information related to counting notification) that sets the voice for counting notification to the voice of your character (donor voice) becomes valid. . As a result, in the same state, character setting status 1 (other than counting report) and character setting status 2 (counting report) are both set to "Don".

Therefore, for example, in the M+102th game, when the player performs a counting operation using the operation means (for example, a counting button not shown), according to the character setting situation 2 (counting notification), the character voice ( Execute counting notification (counting notification according to counting notification setting information) by voice).

In addition, the counting notification setting information that is set when the counting notification setting information is initialized is not limited to the counting notification setting information in which the voice of the counting notification is the voice of the character of the count (duo voice), and the voice of the counting notification may be counting notification setting information in which the voice of another character (for example, a princess character) is used.

<Counting notification and alerting notification / voice (default voice)>
FIG. 37(b) is a diagram showing an example of count notification by the voice (default voice).

In FIG. 37(b), the state indicated by symbol T4' is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 (non-login state) and the M+100th game has started.

Since this state is the state after at least one game has been played (a certain condition has been met) after being set to the logout state, the count notification voice is the voice of the old man's character (old man's voice). The counting notification setting information (counting notification setting information related to counting notification) becomes invalid, and the counting notification setting information (counting notification setting information related to counting notification) that sets the voice for counting notification to the voice of your character (donor voice) becomes valid. . As a result, in the same state, character setting status 1 (other than counting report) and character setting status 2 (counting report) are both set to "Don".

Therefore, in the same state, when the player performs a counting operation using the operation means (for example, a counting button not shown), the character's voice (donor voice) follows the character setting situation 2 (counting notification). Execute counting notification (counting notification according to counting notification setting information).

Specifically, in the counting notification of this example, when the counting process is completed, as shown in FIG. , counting notification (in this example, outputting a voice saying "counting is completed") for notifying that the counting process has been completed.

According to this example, it is possible to limit the period in which the count notification according to the count notification setting information set by the player can be executed, so that other players do not feel annoyed.

In addition, the slot machine according to the present example, when executing count notification according to the count notification setting information (eg, count notification by the voice of the character of the old man (old man voice)), reports on the game information (for example, the voice of the old man). If a certain condition is not satisfied (when a specified number of games or more have not been played since the game was set to the login state), It is configured so as not to notify about game information.

In the logout state before the start of the M+100 games, a specified number of games or more (in this example, 100 games or more) have not been played (a certain condition has not been met) since the login state was set. The attention calling notification (notification regarding game information) by the voice of the old man character (old man voice) as shown in 37(a-2) is not executed.

The condition for whether or not to execute the alert notification (whether or not the game has been played for a specified number of games or more (in this example, 100 games or more) since being set to the login state) is not limited to the above condition, and if it is in the login state It may be executed regardless of the number of games played, or may be executed as long as the number of games is equal to or greater than a specified number of games regardless of the login status.

According to this example, since it is possible to selectively use the presence or absence of notification depending on the setting of the conditions, it is possible to prevent the notification regarding the game information from becoming a troublesome notification. In addition, it is possible to prevent the notification of the game information from becoming a troublesome notification without notifying the game information at an unnecessary timing.

<Counting notification and warning notification/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is capable of executing a counting process including a process of updating the number of game values (for example, the number of won medals). Value number control means, notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277) capable of executing count notification related to the counting process, character setting information related to characters (for example, count notification voice) a setting means (for example, a custom function) capable of setting setting information for a voice (old voice), wherein the notifying means is adapted to the character setting information set by the setting means; In a corresponding manner, the count notification (for example, the count notification by the voice of the old man character (old man voice) shown in FIG. 37 (a-2) (output of the voice saying "counting is completed")) can be executed. It is a game machine characterized by

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to execute count notification according to the character setting information set by the player, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game, and it is convenient for the player. can enhance sexuality.

Further, it comprises production means capable of executing production and initialization means capable of initializing the character setting information, wherein the production means responds to the character setting information set by the setting means. When the character setting information is initialized by the initializing means, the effecting means executes the effect corresponding to the initialized state. , even in a state in which the character setting information is initialized by the initialization means, until a certain condition is satisfied (for example, until at least one game is executed after being set to the logout state), the character The count notification may be executed in a manner corresponding to the character setting information set by the setting means before the setting information is initialized.

With such a configuration, since there are a certain number of players who count the number of game values after logging out, even if the character setting information has been initialized by logging out, the game will continue until a certain condition is satisfied. By making it possible to execute the count notification according to the character setting information set in the logged-in state, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction and convenience.

Further, the certain condition may be a condition that is satisfied when at least one game is executed after the character setting information is initialized by the initialization means.

With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the period in which count notification according to the character setting information set by the player can be executed, so that other players do not feel annoyed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a game value number control means capable of executing a counting process including a process of updating the game value number (for example, the number of won medals). and a notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277) capable of executing count notification related to the counting process, wherein the notification means executes the count notification 37(a-2), a certain notification (for example, an attention-calling notification by the voice of an old man character (old man voice) shown in FIG. This game machine is characterized in that there is a case.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to execute a certain notification when performing the count notification, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game and improve the convenience of the player. can. In addition, by making the player pay attention to a certain notification together with the count notification, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take the game information, etc., and improve convenience for the player.

Further, the notifying means, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when a specified number of games or more (for example, 100 games or more) have been played since the login state was set), A certain notification may be performed, and the notification means may not perform the certain notification when the certain condition is not satisfied.

With such a configuration, it is possible to selectively use the presence or absence of notification depending on the setting of the conditions, so that it is possible to prevent the notification regarding the game information from becoming a troublesome notification.

In addition, an operation means (for example, cross key 191a, OK button 191b, etc.) capable of inputting a password (for example, a login password) and a login state are set when the password input by operating the operation means is valid. The certain condition may be a condition that is satisfied at least when the login state is set by the state management means.

With such a configuration, when the user is not in the logged-in state, the notification is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the notification regarding the game information from becoming a troublesome notification.

In addition, an operation means (for example, cross key 191a, OK button 191b, etc.) capable of inputting a password (for example, a login password) and a login state are set when the password input by operating the operation means is valid. wherein the certain condition is satisfied when a specified number of games or more (for example, 100 games or more) are played after the login state is set by the state management means. may be

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the notification regarding the game information from becoming a troublesome notification without notifying at an unnecessary timing.

<Two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated>
Next, the two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, the "complete function" means that the difference between the maximum value of the acquisition difference number and the minimum value of the acquisition difference number (maximum difference number, so-called MY value) of the game value (for example, medals) is a certain value (this example 19000) is reached (when the complete function is activated), a notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (complete function activation notification) is performed, and the game is stopped.

Note that when the complete function is activated in the AT state, the AT state is immediately terminated and the normal state is entered. Also, when the complete function is activated during the bonus game, the bonus game may be immediately terminated and the normal state may be entered, or the normal state may be entered after the bonus game is completed.

When the complete function is activated, it is possible to reset (cancel) the complete function by turning on the power or changing the settings, but since the power cannot be turned off during the business hours of the amusement arcade, It is not possible to reset (cancel) the complete function automatically.

<Two-dimensional code display/display example 1 when the complete function is activated>
FIGS. 38(a) to 38(f) are diagrams showing an example of two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated.

In this example, after logging in to the game system 10, the character setting information is set to Grandpa by the custom function. is set.

The state shown in FIG. 38(a) is a state in which a game is being played while logged in to the gaming system 10, and the state shown in FIG. It is in a state of

In the state shown in FIG. 38(b), the maximum difference number of medals from the start of the game reaches 18500, and when there are 500 medals left, the complete function is activated and the game is stopped, so the complete function is activated. The complete operation advance notice is being executed.

In the complete operation advance notice of this example, a complete operation advance notice display ST1 (in this example, a character string “will be terminated soon”) indicating that the complete function will operate is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. ) is displayed, and a complete activation warning sound (in this example, an old man's voice saying "It will be over soon") is output from the speakers 272 and 277 to suggest that the complete function will be activated. .

The state shown in FIG. 38(c) is a state in which a predetermined number of games have passed since the state shown in FIG.

The slot machine according to this example includes counting means (for example, a counter) capable of counting the number of game values (for example, the maximum number of medal differences), display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and two-dimensional code generation means. and the display means can display a game stop suggestion notification (for example, a complete function activation notice) that suggests execution of a game stop when the number of game values reaches a certain value (for example, 19000). The two-dimensional code generation means can generate a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code at the end) even when the display means displays the game stop suggestion notification, and the display means can generate the game stop suggestion notification A two-dimensional code can be displayed when the notification is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 38(c), the maximum difference number of medals (game value number) has reached 19000 (a certain value), and the complete function has been activated. (Game Stop Suggestion Notification) ST2 (in this example, the display of the character string "stop, stop the game.") is displayed.

In addition, since the complete function has been activated, the end time two-dimensional code CD1 is displayed and the display of the end time two-dimensional code CD1 is erased (automatically) without depending on the player's operation means. and the explanation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of this end (in this example, the character string "Please read the two-dimensional code with the terminal and save the game record on the mobile site") is displayed. .

The player acquires the URL information by reading the termination time two-dimensional code CD1 displayed on the display device (liquid crystal display device 157 in this example) of the slot machine 50b with the portable terminal device 70 or the like, and acquires the acquired URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (website managed by the management computer 30) based on It is possible to save game-related information such as the number of executions, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, and custom character release information.

According to this example, when the game stop suggestion notification (in this example, the complete function activation notification ST2) is displayed, the two-dimensional code (in this example, the two-dimensional code at the end) can be displayed, so that the game In addition to being able to notify that the game is stopped, the two-dimensional code can be acquired even when the game is stopped, so that the convenience of the player can be improved, and the game information can be forgotten ( Forgetting to record game information) can be prevented. In addition, since the two-dimensional code is automatically displayed when the game is stopped, convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In this example, when the complete function is activated (when the maximum difference number of medals reaches 19000), the end time two-dimensional code CD1 is automatically displayed without the player's operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Before displaying the dimensional code CD1, it is preferable not to display the display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG.

According to this example, a method of displaying a two-dimensional code (in this example, a two-dimensional code at the end) before displaying a game stop suggestion (in this example, the complete function activation notification ST2) (for example, a two-dimensional code at the end) Before the code CD1 is displayed, a display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. A method of displaying a two-dimensional code after displaying a suggestion to stop (for example, before displaying the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end, do not display the display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 33(d), or automatically displaying the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end without depending on the operation by the operation means), the difference in the display method of the two-dimensional code can suggest that the game will be stopped, and the player's Convenience can be improved.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 1(c), the complete function is activated and the two-dimensional code CD1 is displayed at the time of completion. ), the state changes from the login state to the logout state.

In addition, since the logout state has been entered, the count notification setting information is initialized so that the count notification sound is the voice of the character of the old man (old man voice). Count notification setting information is set for the voice of Tono's character (Tono's voice).

The state shown in FIG. 38(d) is a state in which the end-of-display confirmation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 is started.

In the same state, in the state where the end time two-dimensional code CD1 is being displayed as shown in FIG. is displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before the two-dimensional code is read, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

The state shown in FIG. 38(e) is the state in which the counting process is being executed, and the state shown in FIG. 38(f) is the state in which the counting process has ended.

In the state shown in (e) of the same figure, since the player has performed a counting operation using the operation means (for example, a counting button not shown), a counting process including a process of updating the number of game values is executed. In the display area of the display device 157, a counting process indication (in this example, a character string "counting...") is displayed to notify that the counting process is being executed.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 4(f), the counting process is completed, and the counting notification setting information is set so that the voice for the counting notification is the default (initial setting) voice of the character of the lord (lord's voice). Therefore, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a count notification (in this example, display of a character string "counting completed") is displayed to notify that the counting process is completed, and from the speakers 272 and 277, The voice of the character of Tono (dono voice) is used to notify the completion of the counting process (in this example, the output of the voice saying "The counting is completed").

As described above, when the complete function is activated, the user is logged out (because the two-dimensional code CD1 is displayed at the end). And unlike the normal logout state (when the complete function is not operating), even if one game is not executed after being set to the logout state (at the time of the logout state), the count notification voice is the default (initial setting).

According to this example, instead of the voice of the character of the old man (old man voice) set by the player in the custom function, the default voice of the character of the old man (the voice of the old man) is used for the count notification, so that the complete function is activated. It is possible to audibly grasp that the player has entered the logout state by pressing the button, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

<Two-dimensional code display/display example 2 when the complete function is activated>
FIGS. 38(g) to 38(j) are diagrams showing modifications of the two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated.

The state shown in FIG. 38(g) is a state in which a predetermined number of games have passed since the state shown in FIG.

In the same state, the maximum difference number of medals (game value number) has reached 19000 (a certain value), and the complete function has been activated, so that a complete function operation notification (game stop suggestion notification) that suggests execution of the game stop is announced. Along with displaying ST2 (in this example, the display of the character string "stop, stop the game."), a guidance display GP (this In the example, the display of the character string "display menu by pressing button") is displayed.

The state shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which a menu display operation (for example, an operation of pressing the OK button 191b) has been performed in the game shown in (g) of the figure and the display of the menu has started.

In the same state, since the complete function has been activated, among the multiple submenus, the submenus other than the submenu "record and finish" and the submenu "return" are displayed in the dark and cannot be selected by selection operation.

The state shown in FIG. 11(i) is a state in which the sub-menu 'record and finish' has been determined in the menu display shown in FIG. 11(h).

In this state, since the complete function has already been activated, a display start confirmation display (for example, a display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. ), an end two-dimensional code CD1, an end button EB for erasing the display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end, and an explanation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end (in this example, " Please read the two-dimensional code on the terminal and save the game record on the mobile site") is displayed.

The player acquires the URL information by reading the termination time two-dimensional code CD1 displayed on the display device (liquid crystal display device 157 in this example) of the slot machine 50b with the portable terminal device 70 or the like, and acquires the acquired URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (website managed by the management computer 30) based on It is possible to save game-related information such as the number of executions, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, and custom character release information.

The state shown in (j) is a state in which the end-of-display confirmation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 is started.

In the same state, in the state where the end time two-dimensional code CD1 is being displayed as shown in FIG. is displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before the two-dimensional code is read, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

<Two-dimensional code display/summary when the complete function is activated>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment includes counting means (for example, a counter) capable of counting the number of game values (for example, the maximum difference number of medals). , display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157), access information (for example, URL information) for accessing an external server (for example, the management computer 30 shown in FIG. 31), and game information (for example, the number of games played) , the number of times each winning role was won, the number of times each performance was executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc.) , wherein the display means provides a game stop suggestion notification (for example, FIG. 38 (c) can display the complete function activation notification ST2), and the two-dimensional code generation means generates the two-dimensional code (for example, A two-dimensional code CD1) at the end shown in FIG. 38(c) can be generated, and the display means can display the two-dimensional code when the game stop suggestion notification is displayed. It is a playground to play.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify that the game is stopped, and even if the game is stopped, it is possible to acquire the two-dimensional code, which is convenient for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take the game information (forgetting to record the game information).

In addition, a method of displaying the two-dimensional code before displaying the game stop suggestion notification (for example, before displaying the end time two-dimensional code CD1, displaying a display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 33(d) or display the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end based on the player's operation by the operation means), and a method of displaying the two-dimensional code after displaying the game stop suggestion notification (for example, two-dimensional code at the end) Before the code CD1 is displayed, the display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 33(d) is not displayed, or the two-dimensional code CD1 is automatically displayed at the time of termination without depending on the operation of the player's operation means) may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the game is to be stopped by the difference in the display method of the two-dimensional code, thereby enhancing convenience for the player.

Further, operation means (for example, cross key 191a, OK button 191b, etc.) is provided, and the display means displays the two-dimensional code without depending on the operation by the operation means when the game stop suggestion notification is displayed. It may be possible.

With such a configuration, the two-dimensional code is automatically displayed when the game is stopped, so convenience for the player can be enhanced.

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.

Therefore, for example, the present invention can be applied to a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. Also, in the present embodiment, as a display that may or may not be accompanied by animation, a blessing display or the like has been described, but the present invention is not limited to these displays.

Therefore, for example, it may be an icon (for example, a pending icon or a variable icon), specifically, when the icon occurs before moving to SP reach (in the first display) Display with animation, The icon disappears once when it shifts to SP reach, and is redisplayed when SP reach ends. At this time, the icon may not be accompanied by animation. Also, as a trigger for disappearing (re-displaying) an effect that may or may not be accompanied by animation, a power outage/recovery may be used.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

100 slot machine 110, 111, 112 reel 113 reel window 123 notification lamp 127 payout number display 130, 131, 132 medal insertion button 135 start lever 137, 138, 139 stop button 157 effect image display device 192 effect button 272, 277 speaker 300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control unit

Claims (3)

display means;
an operating means;
a two-dimensional code generating means for generating a two-dimensional code based on generated information including access information for accessing an external server and game information relating to a game;
A game machine comprising
The game information includes certain mission achievement information related to certain missions,
When a certain condition regarding the certain mission is established , the display means indicates that the certain condition is established in a certain variable game subsequent to the next game variation of the variable game in which the certain condition is established. It is possible to display the mission achievement display to
The two-dimensional code generating means can generate the two-dimensional code including the certain mission achievement information even before the certain variable game is started ,
The display means can display the two-dimensional code including the certain mission achievement information based on a first operation by the operation means before the certain variable game is started .
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
the display means can display the two-dimensional code based on a second operation by the operation means;
When the two-dimensional code is displayed based on the first operation in a logged-in state, a logged-out state is entered,
maintaining the logged-in state when the two-dimensional code is displayed based on the second operation in the logged-in state;
the two-dimensional code displayed based on the second operation does not include the certain mission achievement information;
A playground characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The display means includes the certain mission achievement information regarding the certain mission even before the certain mission is achieved, when it is determined that the certain mission is to be achieved. code can be displayed,
A playground characterized by:

Images